User Guide Second Edition Rev 1 CHEROKEE 19KL-926-AA Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next

appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). www.jeep.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often. Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. 2019 CHEROKEE USER GUIDE This guide has been prepared to help you get Driving and Alcohol quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of source for common questions. However, it is not a collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with substitute for your Owner’s Manual. blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking For complete operational instructions, maintenance driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect WARNING! manuals found on the website on the back cover The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your Important vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and Get warranty and other information online – you can recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any Not all features shown in this guide may apply your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, device or feature that may take their attention off the road. to your vehicle. For additional information on Never drink and then drive. Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious or your local Jeep® brand dealer. www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable done while the vehicle is moving. year, make and model of your vehicle. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. Congratulations on selecting your new FCA obligation upon itself to install them on prod- This User Guide is not a replacement for the full LLC US FCA FROM WELCOME US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents ucts previously manufactured. Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every precision workmanship, distinctive styling, operation and procedure possible with your ve- This User Guide has been prepared to help and high quality. hicle. you quickly become acquainted with the im- ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the portant features of your vehicle. It contains For more detailed descriptions of the topics road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on most things you will need to operate and discussed in this User Guide, as well as the steering wheel. You have full responsibil- maintain the vehicle, including emergency information covering features and processes ity and assume all risks related to the use of information. not covered in this User Guide, the full ve- the features and applications in this vehicle. hicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for Only use the features and applications when When it comes to service, remember that your free online in a printer-friendly PDF format. it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle in an accident involving serious injury or best, has factory-trained technicians and To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable death. genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro- satisfaction. priate web address below: This guide illustrates and describes the op- eration of features and equipment that are www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html either standard or optional on this vehicle. HOW TO FIND YOUR (U.S. Residents) This guide may also include a description of OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. This publication has been prepared as a ref- FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our Please disregard any features and equipment erence item to help you quickly become ac- environment and natural resources. By con- described in this guide that are not available quainted with the most important features verting from paper to electronic delivery for on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the and processes of your vehicle. It contains the majority of the user information for your right to make changes in design and specifi- most things you will need to operate and vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de- cations and/or make additions to or improve- maintain the vehicle, including emergency mand for tree-based products and lessen the ments to its products without imposing any information and procedures. stress on our environment.

1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi- Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu- cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can Essential Information page. A few pages further there is a key for cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper- getting to know the chapter order and the ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli- Each time direction instructions (left/right or relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are a textual indication of the current chapter at fatal injury. Drive carefully. given, these must be intended as regarding the side of each even page. an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be Symbols properly specified in the text. Some vehicle components have colored la- The figures in this User Guide are provided by bels whose symbols indicate precautions to way of example only: this might imply that be observed when using this component. some details of the image do not correspond Rollover Warning Label to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. ROLLOVER WARNING

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Failure to use the driver and passenger seat In addition, the User Guide has been con- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher belts provided is a major cause of severe or ceived considering vehicles with steering rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a notes that the universal use of existing seat that on vehicles with steering wheel on the higher center of gravity than many passenger belts could cut the highway death toll by right side, the position or construction of vehicles. It is capable of performing better in 10,000 or more each year and could reduce some controls is not exactly mirror-like with a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven disabling injuries by two million annually. In respect to the figure. in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi- of control. Because of the higher center of To identify the chapter with the information cantly more likely to die than a person wear- gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may needed you can consult the index at the end ing a seat belt. Always buckle up. of this User Guide. roll over while some other vehicles may not.

2 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE CHANGES/ MANUAL THIS USE TO HOW While reading this User Guide you will find a ALTERATIONS series of WARNINGS to be followed to pre- IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the vent incorrect use of components which vehicle might seriously affect its safety and could cause accidents or injuries. road holding, thus causing accidents, in There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol- which the occupants could even be fatally lowed to prevent against procedures that injured. could result in damage to your vehicle.

3 4 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND OPERATING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC DOORS ...... 19 WIPER AND WASHERS ...... 36 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry ...... 19 FrontWipers ...... 36 HOW TO FIND YOUR OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE ....1 Locking The Doors With One Or More Doors Rain Sensing Wipers ...... 36 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Open ...... 22 Rear Wiper ...... 37 Auto Relocking ...... 22 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...... 38 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...... 2 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Essential Information ...... 2 Rear Doors ...... 23 Overview ...... 38 Symbols ...... 2 SEATS ...... 23 Climate Control Functions ...... 45 ROLLOVER WARNING ...... 2 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ...... 23 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...... 3 Heated Seats ...... 26 If Equipped ...... 46 VEHICLE CHANGES/ALTERATIONS ...... 3 Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .....27 Operating Tips ...... 46 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat WINDOWS ...... 47 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF Feature ...... 28 Power Window Controls ...... 47 CONTENTS HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 29 Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection . 48 TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... 11 Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . 29 Reset Auto-Up ...... 48 Rear Head Restraints ...... 30 Window Lockout Switch ...... 49 INTERIOR ...... 12 STEERING WHEEL ...... 31 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — GETTING TO KNOW YOUR Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...... 31 IF EQUIPPED ...... 49 VEHICLE Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped .....32 Opening Sunroof ...... 50 MIRRORS ...... 33 Venting Sunroof ...... 50 KEYS ...... 13 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 33 Closing Sunroof ...... 50 KeyFob...... 13 WindBuffeting ...... 50 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 33 IGNITIONSWITCH...... 15 Headlight Switch ...... 33 Opening Power Shade ...... 51 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...... 15 Headlights ...... 33 Closing Power Shade ...... 51 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....17 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — Pinch Protect Feature ...... 51 General Information ...... 17 If Equipped ...... 33 Sunroof Maintenance ...... 52 Ignition Off Operation ...... 52 SENTRY KEY ...... 17 High Beams ...... 34 General Information ...... 17 Flash-To-Pass ...... 34 HOOD ...... 52 Irregular Operation ...... 18 AutomaticLighting ...... 34 Opening The Hood ...... 52 Closing The Hood ...... 52 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .....18 ParkingLights ...... 34 Rearming Of The System ...... 18 Headlight Delay ...... 34 LIFTGATE ...... 53 To Arm The System ...... 18 FrontFogLights...... 35 Opening ...... 53 To Disarm The System ...... 19 Turn Signals ...... 35 Closing...... 53 Lane Change Assist ...... 35 Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ...... 54

6 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK) . . . 56 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ...... 76 STARTING AND OPERATING Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . 56 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Erasing All The HomeLink Channels ...... 57 Cybersecurity ...... 76 STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 143 Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine .....143 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Or Non-Rolling Code Device ...... 57 PROGRAMS ...... 77 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 143 Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door PARKING BRAKE ...... 144 Opener ...... 57 SAFETY Electric Park Brake (EPB) ...... 144 Programming HomeLink To A Miscellaneous SAFETY FEATURES ...... 79 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...... 146 Device ...... 58 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 79 Key Ignition Park Interlock ...... 147 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button . . 59 Electronic Brake Control System ...... 80 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock General Information ...... 59 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...... 90 System ...... 147 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 59 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission .....147 Power Outlets ...... 59 If Equipped ...... 90 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ...... 149 Power Inverter — If Equipped ...... 62 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With 1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — GETTING TO KNOW YOUR Mitigation — If Equipped ...... 94 If Equipped ...... 149 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .....96 2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) — INSTRUMENT PANEL OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ...... 101 If Equipped ...... 149 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...... 63 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....101 ShiftPositions ...... 150 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Important Safety Precautions ...... 101 Shifting Procedures ...... 151 Controls ...... 63 Seat Belt Systems ...... 102 Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) Oil Change Reset — If Equipped ...... 64 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . 111 System — If Equipped ...... 153 Instrument Cluster Display ChildRestraints ...... 125 SELEC-TERRAIN ...... 154 SelectableItems...... 65 Transporting Pets ...... 139 Description ...... 154 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode SAFETY TIPS ...... 139 STOP/START SYSTEM ...... 155 Message — Electrical Load Reduction Transporting Passengers ...... 139 Automatic Mode ...... 155 Actions — If Equipped ...... 65 Exhaust Gas ...... 140 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...... 66 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Autostop...... 155 RedWarningLights ...... 67 Vehicle ...... 140 To Start The Engine While In Autostop YellowWarningLights...... 70 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Mode ...... 156 YellowIndicatorLights ...... 73 OutsideTheVehicle...... 142 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start GreenIndicatorLights ...... 74 System ...... 156 WhiteIndicatorLights ...... 75 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start BlueIndicatorLights ...... 76 System ...... 157

7 SPEED CONTROL ...... 157 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...... 171 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...... 196 Activation ...... 158 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 172 TireServiceKitStorage...... 196 Setting A Desired Speed ...... 158 TRAILER TOWING ...... 174 Tire Service Kit Components And Varying The Speed ...... 158 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Operation ...... 197 Resume ...... 159 Weight Ratings) ...... 174 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ...... 197 Accelerating For Passing ...... 159 SealingATireWithTireServiceKit...... 198 Deactivation ...... 159 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...... 175 JUMP STARTING ...... 202 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ...... 159 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Preparations For Jump Start ...... 202 Activation ...... 160 Vehicle...... 175 Jump Starting Procedure ...... 203 Setting A Desired ACC Speed ...... 160 Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ...... 204 Varying The Speed ...... 160 Drive (FWD) Models ...... 176 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...... 204 Resume ...... 161 Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ...... 205 Deactivation ...... 162 1-Speed Power Transfer Unit ...... 176 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...... 205 Setting The Following Distance ...... 162 Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With

TABLE OF CONTENTS Changing Modes ...... 162 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit ...... 176 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...... 206 General Information ...... 163 Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ...... 208 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST ...... 164 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer ParkSense Sensors ...... 164 Unit ...... 208 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...... 180 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Activation/Deactivation ParkSense ...... 164 Control...... 180 Instrument Cluster Display ...... 164 Unit ...... 208 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED .....180 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....164 Recovery Strap — If Equipped ...... 209 BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 184 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST ....166 Replacement Bulbs ...... 184 ParkSense Sensors ...... 166 (EARS) ...... 210 Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...... 185 Activation/Deactivation ...... 166 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ...... 210 Engagement/Disengagement ...... 166 FUSES ...... 185 Operation With A Trailer ...... 167 General Information ...... 185 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE General Warnings ...... 167 Underhood Fuses ...... 185 SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 211 Interior Fuses ...... 191 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — Maintenance Plan ...... 212 IF EQUIPPED ...... 167 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...... 192 Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ...... 214 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...... 192 LANESENSE ...... 168 Preparations For Jacking ...... 193 LaneSense Operation ...... 168 Jacking Instructions ...... 193 Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...... 168 Road Tire Installation ...... 196 LaneSense Warning Message ...... 169 Changing LaneSense Status ...... 170

8 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 215 INTERIORS ...... 248 SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF EQUIPPED ...... 258 2.0L Engine ...... 215 Seats And Fabric Parts ...... 248 SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped 2.4L Engine ...... 216 Plastic And Coated Parts ...... 248 (Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 3.2L Engine ...... 217 Leather Parts ...... 249 8.4–inchDisplay) ...... 258 Checking Oil Level ...... 218 Glass Surfaces ...... 249 SiriusXM Guardian Activation ...... 259 Adding Washer Fluid ...... 218 Download The Uconnect App ...... 260 Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 218 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C DEALER SERVICE ...... 219 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NAVWith8.4-inchDisplay) ...... 260 Engine Oil Filter ...... 219 NUMBER ...... 250 Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...... 219 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Account ...... 261 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 220 SPECIFICATIONS ...... 251 Built-In Features ...... 261 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 223 Torque Specifications ...... 251 SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features .....264 Cooling System ...... 226 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 251 UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DISPLAY — Automatic Transmission ...... 227 2.0L Engine ...... 251 IF EQUIPPED ...... 266 RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 227 2.4L And 3.2L Engines ...... 252 Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A Glance ...... 266 TIRES...... 227 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel TireSafetyInformation ...... 227 Vehicles ...... 252 Clock Setting ...... 267 Tires — General Information ...... 235 Materials Added To Fuel ...... 253 Audio Setting ...... 267 Radio Operation ...... 268 Tire Types ...... 239 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 253 Spare Tires — If Equipped ...... 240 Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 254 With iPhone) ...... 268 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 241 Engine ...... 254 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) ...... 242 Chassis ...... 255 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ...... 269 Tire Rotation Recommendations ...... 244 Uconnect 4 At A Glance ...... 269 MOPAR ACCESSORIES ...... 256 Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...... 271 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE Authentic Accessories By Mopar ...... 256 QUALITY GRADES ...... 245 Radio ...... 272 Treadwear ...... 245 MULTIMEDIA Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 273 Traction Grades ...... 245 Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped . . 274 CYBERSECURITY ...... 257 Temperature Grades ...... 246 UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY . . 275 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 246 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance ...... 275 IF EQUIPPED ...... 258 Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...... 277 BODYWORK ...... 247 Radio Operation ...... 258 Radio ...... 278 Preserving The Bodywork ...... 247 Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 279 Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped . . 282

9 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...... 285 Changing The Volume ...... 300 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE UsingDoNotDisturb ...... 300 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ...... 286 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR Incoming Text Messages ...... 301 NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED ...... 287 VEHICLE ...... 315 Helpful Tips And Common Questions To Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Prepare For The Appointment ...... 315 Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your Volume...... 287 Prepare A List ...... 315 FindingPointsOfInterest ...... 289 Uconnect System ...... 302 Be Reasonable With Requests ...... 315 Finding A Place By Spelling The Name . . . 289 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ....303 One-Step Voice Destination Entry ...... 289 Introducing Uconnect ...... 303 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 315 Setting Your Home Location ...... 289 GetStarted ...... 304 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...... 315 Home ...... 289 Basic Voice Commands ...... 305 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...... 316 Adding A Stop ...... 291 Radio ...... 305 In Mexico Contact ...... 316 TakingADetour ...... 291 Media ...... 305 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands .....316 SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With 8.4–inch Phone ...... 306 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Display) ...... 291 Voice Text Reply ...... 307 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...... 316

TABLE OF CONTENTS SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With 8.4–inch Climate ...... 308 ServiceContract ...... 316 Display) ...... 291 Navigation (4C NAV) ...... 308 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...... 317 SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If UCONNECT PHONE ...... 293 MOPAR PARTS ...... 317 Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Equipped ...... 309 FreeCalling) ...... 293 Register (4C/4C NAV) ...... 309 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...... 317 Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) . . 310 In The 50 United States And Phone To The Uconnect System ...... 296 MobileApp(4C/4CNAV)...... 310 Washington, D.C...... 317 Common Phone Commands (Examples) . . . 299 SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ...... 310 In Canada ...... 318 Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ...... 311 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...... 318 Call ...... 300 UsingDoNotDisturb ...... 311 Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Android Auto — If Equipped ...... 312 INDEX ...... 319 Vehicle ...... 300 Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ...... 313 Phonebook ...... 300 General Information ...... 313 Voice Command Tips ...... 300 Additional Information ...... 314

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel 1 — Air Vents 4 — Uconnect System 2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 5 — Switch Panel 3 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Climate Controls

11 INTERIOR GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Interior Features 1 — Steering Wheel 2 — Glove Compartment 3 — Seats 4 — Gear Selector

12 KEYS Your vehicle may be equipped with a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists Key Fob of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition sys- The key fob operates the ignition switch. tem. The Remote Keyless Entry system con- Insert the square end of the key fob into the sists of a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition switch located on the instrument feature if equipped. panel and rotate to the desired position. The key fob also contains an emergency key, NOTE: which is stored in the rear of the key fob. The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec- tronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the Key Fob doors and liftgate from distances up to ap- 1 — Liftgate proximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld 2 — Lock key fob. The key fob does not need to be 3 — Unlock pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. 4 — Panic 5 — Remote Start • This feature allows the driver to operate the 6 — Emergency Key Release ignition switch with the push of a button as 7 — Emergency Key long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.

13 NOTE: backup method can be used to operate the In case the ignition switch does not change ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key with the push of a button, the key fob may fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key) have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a against the ENGINE START/STOP button and back up method can be used to operate the push to operate the ignition switch. ignition switch. Put the nose side (side oppo- To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate site of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and Push and release the unlock button on the push to operate the ignition switch. key fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate. All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button. Refer to Key Fob “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the 1 — Liftgate Owner’s Manual for further information. 2 — Unlock NOTE: 3 — Lock If the vehicle is unlocked by key fob, and no GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 4 — Remote Start door is opened within 60 seconds, the ve- 5 — Panic hicle will re-lock and if equipped, the secu- rity alarm will arm. To change the current NOTE: setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Mul- In case the ignition switch does not change timedia" in the Owner’s Manual for further with the push of a button, the key fob may information. have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a

14 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- WARNING! ference, and Push and release the lock button on the key • For vehicles equipped with Keyless 2. This device must accept any interference fob to lock all doors and liftgate. Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remem- received, including interference that may Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — ber to place the ignition in the OFF cause undesired operation. Passive Entry mode. NOTE: If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is Duplication of key fobs may be performed at Changes or modifications not expressly ap- open, the doors will lock. The doors will an authorized dealer. This procedure consists proved by the party responsible for compli- unlock again automatically if the key is left of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle ance could void the user’s authority to oper- inside the passenger compartment, otherwise electronics. A blank key fob is one that has ate the equipment. the doors will stay locked. never been programmed. Request For Additional Key Fobs NOTE: IGNITION SWITCH When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys- NOTE: tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition Only key fobs that are programmed to the to an authorized dealer. vehicle electronics can be used to start and This feature allows the driver to operate the operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro- General Information ignition switch with the push of a button as grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro- long as the key fob is in the passenger com- The following regulatory statement applies to grammed to any other vehicle. partment. all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in The push button ignition operating modes are this vehicle: WARNING! OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC • Always remove the key fobs from the Rules and with Industry Canada license- NOTE: vehicle and lock all doors when leaving exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- If the ignition switch does not change with the vehicle unattended. ject to the following two conditions: the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back 15 up method can be used to operate the igni- ACC WARNING! tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite • Engine is not started. of the emergency key) of the key fob against be warned not to touch the parking the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to • Some electrical devices are available. brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. operate the ignition switch. ON/RUN • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to • Driving position. children, and do not leave the ignition of • All the electrical devices are available. a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child START could operate power windows, other • Start the engine. controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside NOTE: parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior The vehicle will not start if the key fob is heat build-up may cause serious injury located inside the cargo area and the liftgate or death. is opened.

WARNING! CAUTION!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • When exiting the vehicle, always remove An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for Keyless Push Button Ignition the key fob from the vehicle and lock thieves. Always remove key fob from the your vehicle. vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the The push button ignition can be placed in the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, vehicle unattended. following modes: or with access to an unlocked vehicle. NOTE: OFF • Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- attended is dangerous for a number of For further information, refer to "Starting The • The engine is stopped. reasons. A child or others could be seri- Engine" in "Starting And Operating." • Some electrical devices (e.g. central lock- ously or fatally injured. Children should ing, alarm, etc.) are still available. 16 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC REMOTE STARTING CAUTION! SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Rules and with Industry Canada license- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not ject to the following two conditions: compatible with some aftermarket remote Push the remote start button on the key fob 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems twice within five seconds. Pushing the re- ference, and mote start button a third time shuts the and loss of security protection. 2. This device must accept any interference engine off. received, including interference that may All of the key fobs provided with your new To drive the vehicle, push the START/STOP cause undesired operation. vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle button to turn the ignition to the ON/RUN electronics. mode. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- General Information NOTE: proved by the party responsible for compli- The following regulatory statement applies to ance could void the user’s authority to oper- • With remote start, the engine will only run all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in ate the equipment. for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the igni- this vehicle: tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC • The vehicle must be started with the key SENTRY KEY Rules and with Industry Canada license- after two consecutive timeouts. The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling General Information ject to the following two conditions: the engine. The system does not need to be The following regulatory statement applies to armed or activated. Operation is automatic, 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or ference, and this vehicle: unlocked. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

17 NOTE: there is a problem with the electronics. In • The horn will pulse. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- addition, if the light begins to flash after the • The turn signals will flash. proved by the party responsible for compli- bulb check, it indicates that someone used • The vehicle security light in the instrument ance could void the user’s authority to oper- an invalid key fob to try to start the engine. cluster will flash. ate the equipment. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. Rearming Of The System Irregular Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during If something triggers the alarm, and no action The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle there is a fault in the electronics. Should this five seconds between cycles, up to eight operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as cycles if the trigger remains active and the programmed to the vehicle can be used to possible by an authorized dealer. vehicle security alarm will rearm itself. start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ToArm The System fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. — IF EQUIPPED Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security The system will shut the engine off in two alarm: seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve- the engine. hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized op- in the “OFF” mode. NOTE: eration. While the vehicle security alarm is • For vehicles equipped with Keyless En- A key fob that has not been programmed is armed, interior switches for door locks and try, make sure the vehicle’s keyless also considered an invalid key. liftgate release are disabled. If something ignition system is OFF. During normal operation, after placing the triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm keyless ignition in the ON/RUN mode, the will provide the following audible and visible Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three signals: seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that 18 2. Perform one of the following methods to • Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the lock the vehicle: disarm the system. battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the • Push the lock button on the interior NOTE: power door lock switch with the driver battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will and/or passenger door open. • The driver's door key cylinder and the lift- flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, gate button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security alarm. • Push the lock button on the exterior disarm the vehicle security alarm. Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid • The vehicle security alarm remains armed DOORS key fob available in the same exterior during power liftgate entry. Pushing the zone. Refer to "Doors" in "Getting To Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle Manual for further information. security alarm. If someone enters the ve- The Passive Entry system is an enhancement hicle through the liftgate and opens any to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system • Push the lock button on the key fob. door, the alarm will sound. and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Pas- 3. If any doors are open, close them. • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, sive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door ToDisarm The System the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. without having to push the key fob lock or The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed unlock buttons. using any of the following methods: The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create NOTE: • Push the unlock button on the key fob. conditions where the system will give you a • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; • Grasp the passive entry door handle to false alarm. If one of the previously described refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further in- To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s security alarm will arm, regardless of whether formation. Manual for further information. you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. 19 • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has To Unlock From The Driver's Side NOTE: been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro- With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be grammed, all doors will unlock when you grab (1.5m) of the driver's door handle, grab the affected, resulting in a slower response hold of the front driver’s door handle. To time. front driver door handle to unlock the driver's select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st door automatically. • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” and no door is opened within 60 seconds, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor- arm the security alarm. mation. • The key fob may not be able to be detected To Unlock From The Passenger Side by the vehicle passive entry system if it is With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft located next to a mobile phone, laptop or (1.5m) of the passenger door handle, grab other electronic device; these devices may the front passenger door handle to unlock all block the key fob's wireless signal and four doors and the liftgate automatically. prevent the passive entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle. NOTE: • Passive Entry activates illuminated ap- All doors will unlock when the front passen- proach for the time set by the customer (0, ger door handle is grabbed regardless of the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 30, 60, or 90 seconds), and flashes the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Un- lock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All turn signal lights. Refer to “Uconnect Set- Grab The Door Handle To Unlock tings” in “Multimedia in the Owner’s Doors 1st Press”). Manual for further information.

20 Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry NOTE: To Lock The Liftgate Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside To minimize the possibility of unintentionally (1.5m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your doors when any of the following conditions lock button located to the left of liftgate vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped are true: handle release. with an automatic door unlock feature which NOTE: will function if the ignition is OFF. • The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs. The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with • Three attempts are made to lock the doors all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock passive entry. There are three situations that using the door panel switch and then close feature is built into the electronic liftgate trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive the doors. release. entry vehicle: • If the liftgate is opened and then all 4 doors • A lock request is made by a valid Passive are locked, the key fob will become locked Entry key fob while a door is open. in the vehicle if the liftgate is closed and • A lock request is made by the Passive Entry will not alert the customer. door handle while a door is open. To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate • A lock request is made by the door panel The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is switch while the door is open. built into liftgate handle release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the When any of these situations occur, after all liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search open with one fluid motion. will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer. Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location 21 To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate • If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System, the key protection de- With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key scribed in "Preventing Inadvertent Locking fob within 5ft (1.5m) of the driver or passen- of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle" remains ger front door handles, push the Passive active/functional. Entry lock button located on the outside door handle. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicle’s inte- rior door panel. Locking The Doors With One Or More Doors Open DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When If the door lock switch is pushed while the Locking ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's NOTE: door is open, the doors will not lock.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • After pushing the door handle button, you Auto Relocking must wait two seconds before you can lock The auto door lock feature default condition or unlock the doors, using either Passive is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Entry door handle. This is done to allow you lock automatically when the vehicle's speed to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling NOTE: exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door the door handle without the vehicle react- DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an ing and unlocking. the door handle lock button. This could un- authorized dealer per written request of the lock the door(s). customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service. 22 Child-Protection Door Lock System — WARNING! Rear Doors more likely to be seriously injured or To provide a safer environment for small chil- killed. dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors • Do not allow people to ride in any area of are equipped with a Child-Protection Door your vehicle that is not equipped with Lock system. seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more To use the system, open each rear door, use a likely to be seriously injured or killed. flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. seat and using a seat belt properly. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped door handle even if the inside door lock is in This feature allows the driver to store up to the unlocked position. Child-Protection Door Lock Function two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory pro- SEATS file contains desired position settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint desired radio station presets. System of the vehicle. The memory switch is located on the driver's WARNING! side door panel. The switch contains three buttons, a set (S) button to activate the • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, memory save function, memory button (1) inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- and memory button (2). The memory switch sion, people riding in these areas are allows the driver to recall either of the two

23 pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to de- • To set a memory profile to your key fob, the appropriate number button on the switch. sired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror refer to “Linking And Unlinking The Re- and radio station presets). mote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section. 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch, then push memory button Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless (1) within five seconds. The instrument Entry Key Fob To Memory cluster display will display which memory Your remote keyless entry key fob can be position is being set. programmed to recall one of two pre- If desired, a second memory profile can be programmed memory profiles with a push of stored into memory as follows: the unlock button on the key fob. 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/ NOTE: RUN position. Before programming your key fob you must select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to de- Fob” feature through the Uconnect system sired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror screen. Driver Memory Switch and radio station presets). Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the GETTING TO KNOW YOURProgramming VEHICLE The Memory Feature dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor- memory switch, then push memory button mation. To create a new memory profile, perform the (2) within five seconds. The instrument following: cluster display will display which memory To program your key fob, perform the follow- position is being set. ing: NOTE: 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF Saving a new memory profile will erase an NOTE: position. existing profile from memory. • Memory profiles can be set without the 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/ vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in RUN position. PARK to recall a memory profile. 24 2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2. Memory Position Recall The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned NOTE: NOTE: when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the If a memory profile has not already been The vehicle must be in PARK to recall OFF position. set, refer to "Programming The Memory memory positions. If a recall is attempted Feature" in this section for instructions on when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message • When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the how to set a memory profile. will display in the instrument cluster display. OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the • To recall the memory settings for driver one, driver seat position is greater than or equal memory switch, then within five seconds push memory button number (1) or the to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear push and release the button labeled (1) or unlock button on the key fob linked to stop. The seat will return to its previously (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” memory position 1. set position when you cycle the vehicle’s (1 or 2) will display in the instrument • To recall the memory settings for driver two, ignition to the ACC or RUN position. cluster display. push memory button number (2) or the • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled 4. Push and release the lock button on the unlock button on the key fob linked to when the driver seat position is less than key fob within 10 seconds. memory position 2. 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no ben- A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the NOTE: efit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory Exit or Easy Entry. settings by pushing the set (S) button, fol- When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will Each stored memory setting will have an lowed by pushing the unlock button on the stop moving. A delay of one second will occur associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position. key fob within 10 seconds. before another recall can be selected. Easy Entry/Exit Seat NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled This feature provides automatic driver seat when the vehicle is delivered from the fac- positioning to enhance driver mobility when tory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled entering and exiting the vehicle. (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. 25 Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Pro- Front Heated Seats Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start grammable Features” in “Multimedia” in the If your vehicle is equipped with front heated On models that are equipped with remote Owner’s Manual for further information. seats, the control buttons are located within start, the heated seats can be programmed to Heated Seats the Uconnect system. You can gain access to come on during a remote start. the control buttons through the climate On some models, the front and rear seats may screen or the controls screen. This feature can be programmed through the be equipped with heaters located in the seat Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set- cushions and seat backs. • Press the heated seat button once to tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s turn the HI setting on. Manual for further information. WARNING! • Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting on. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to • Press the heated seat button a third the skin because of advanced age, time to turn the heating elements off. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in- the skin because of advanced age, jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- If the HI-level setting is selected, the system chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in- tion or other physical condition must will automatically switch to LO-level after jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- exercise care when using the seat approximately 60 minutes of continuous op- tion or other physical condition must heater. It may cause burns even at low eration. At that time, the display will change exercise care when using the seat

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE temperatures, especially if used for long from HI to LO, indicating the change. The heater. It may cause burns even at low periods of time. LO-level setting will turn off automatically temperatures, especially if used for long • Do not place anything on the seat or after approximately 45 minutes. periods of time. seatback that insulates against heat, such • Do not place anything on the seat or NOTE: as a blanket or cushion. This may cause seatback that insulates against heat, such The engine must be running for the heated the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a as a blanket or cushion. This may cause seats to operate. seat that has been overheated could the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a cause serious burns due to the increased seat that has been overheated could surface temperature of the seat.

26 • The engine must be running for the heated The front ventilated seats control buttons are WARNING! seats to operate. located within the Uconnect system. You can cause serious burns due to the increased gain access to the control buttons through When the HI-level setting is selected, the surface temperature of the seat. the climate screen or the controls screen. heater will provide a boosted heat level dur- Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped ing the first four minutes of operation. Then, • Press the ventilated seat button once the heat output will drop to the normal HI- to choose HI. On some models, the two outboard rear seats level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the • Press the ventilated seat button a are equipped with heated seats. The heated system will automatically switch to LO-level second time to choose LO. seat switches for these seats are located on after approximately 60 minutes of continu- the rear of the center console. • Press the ventilated seat button a third ous operation. At that time, the number of time to turn the ventilated seat off. There are two heated seat switches that allow illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, the rear passengers to operate the seats in- indicating the change. The LO-level setting NOTE: dependently. Amber indicator lights in each will turn OFF automatically after approxi- The engine must be running for the ventilated switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two mately 45 minutes. seats to operate. indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF. Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start • Push the heated seat button once to If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated On models that are equipped with remote turn the HI setting on. seats, the seat cushion and seat back will start, the ventilated seats can be pro- • Push the heated seat button a second have fans that draw the air from the passen- grammed to come on during a remote start. time to turn the LO setting on. ger compartment and move air through fine This feature can be programmed through the • Push the heated seat button a third perforations in the seat cover to help keep the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set- time to turn the heating elements off. driver and front passenger cooler in higher tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner's ambient temperatures. The fans operate at Manual. NOTE: two speeds, HI and LO. • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. 27 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With WARNING! Fold-Flat Feature • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a To provide additional storage area, each rear cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. seat can be folded flat. This allows for ex- In a collision, people riding in these tended cargo space and still maintains some areas are more likely to be seriously rear seating room. injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

To Lower The Rear Seat Rear Fixed Seat Release Lever 1. Lift the seatback release lever located on NOTE: the upper outer edge of the seat. If your Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be vehicle is equipped with a sliding rear seat, you can also pull the pull strap GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE necessary to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be sure that the located on the middle outer edge of the front seats are fully upright and positioned seat. 60/40 Rear Sliding Seat forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold 2. Fold the rear seatback completely down easily. forward. 1 — Lift Lever To Fold 2 — Pull Strap To Recline 3—Lift Bar To Adjust Forward/Rearward

28 NOTE: HEAD RESTRAINTS Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the Head restraints are designed to reduce the The front driver and passenger seats are seats are left folded for an extended period of risk of injury by restricting head movement in equipped with Reactive Head Restraints time. This is normal and by simply placing the event of a rear impact. Head restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear impact, the the seats to the open position, over time the should be adjusted so that the top of the head RHRs will automatically extend forward mini- seat cushion will return to its normal shape. restraint is located above the top of your ear. mizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s head and the RHR. To Raise The Rear Seat WARNING! The RHRs will automatically return to their NOTE: normal position following a rear impact. If the • All occupants, including the driver, If interference from the cargo area prevents RHRs do not return to their normal position, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a the seatback from fully locking, you will have see your authorized dealer immediately. difficulty returning the seat to its proper po- vehicle’s seat until the head restraints sition. are placed in their proper positions in To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the order to minimize the risk of neck injury head restraint. To lower the head restraint, Raise the seatback and lock it into place. in the event of a crash. push the adjustment button, located at the • Head restraints should never be ad- base of the head restraint, and push down- WARNING! justed while the vehicle is in motion. ward on the head restraint. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints Be certain that the seatback is securely improperly adjusted or removed could NOTE: locked into position. If the seatback is not cause serious injury or death in the event To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as securely locked into position the seat will of a collision. it can go. Then, push the release button and not provide the proper stability for child the adjustment button at the base of each seats and/or passengers. An improperly NOTE: post while pulling the head restraint up. Seat- latched seat could cause serious injury. Do not reverse the head restraints (making back angle may need to be adjusted to fully the rear of the head restraint face forward) in remove the head restraint. To reinstall the an attempt to gain additional clearance to the head restraint, put the head restraint posts back of your head. into the holes and push downward. Then 29 adjust the head restraint to the appropriate Rear Head Restraints height. WARNING! The rear outboard and center head restraints • A loose head restraint thrown forward in have two positions: up and down. When the a collision or hard stop could cause center seat is being occupied the head re- serious injury or death to occupants of straint should be in the raised position. When the vehicle. Always securely stow re- there is no occupant in the center seat, the moved head restraints in a location out- head restraint can be lowered for maximum side the occupant compartment. • ALL the head restraints MUST be rein- visibility for the driver. stalled in the vehicle to properly protect To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the occupants. Follow the re-installation the head restraint. To lower the head re- instructions above prior to operating the straint, push the adjustment button, located vehicle or occupying a seat. at the base of the head restraint, and push • Do not place items over the top of the downward on the head restraint. Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. NOTE: Front Head Restraint These items may interfere with the op- To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as eration of the Reactive Head Restraint in 1 — Release Button it can go. Then, push the release button and GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the event of a collision and could result 2 — Adjustment Button the adjustment button at the base of each in serious injury or death. post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push down- ward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

30 STEERING WHEEL

Tilt/TelescopingSteering Column This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering col- umn. The tilt/telescoping lever is located be- low the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

Outboard Head Restraint Center Head Restraint 1 — Release Button 1 — Adjustment Button 2 — Adjustment Button 2 — Release Button

WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be rein- stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation Tilt/Telescoping Lever instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

31 To unlock the steering column, push the Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start control handle downward (toward the floor). The steering wheel contains a heating ele- On models that are equipped with remote To tilt the steering column, move the steering ment that helps warm your hands in cold start, the heated steering wheel can be pro- wheel upward or downward as desired. To weather. The heated steering wheel has only grammed to come on during a remote start lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull one temperature setting. Once the heated through the Uconnect system. Refer to the steering wheel outward or push it inward steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the as desired. To lock the steering column in on for an average of 80 minutes before auto- Owner’s Manual for further information. position, push the control handle upward matically shutting off. This time will vary until fully engaged. based on environmental temperatures. The WARNING! heated steering wheel can shut off early or WARNING! may not turn on when the steering wheel is • Persons who are unable to feel pain to already warm. the skin because of advanced age, Do not adjust the steering column while chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in- driving. Adjusting the steering column The heated steering wheel control button is jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- while driving or driving with the steering located within the Uconnect system. You can tion, or other physical conditions must column unlocked, could cause the driver gain access to the control button through the exercise care when using the steering to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to climate screen or the controls screen. wheel heater. It may cause burns even at follow this warning may result in serious • Press the heated steering wheel button low temperatures, especially if used for GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE injury or death. once to turn the heating element on. long periods. • Do not place anything on the steering • Press the heated steering wheel button wheel that insulates against heat, such a second time to turn the heating element off. as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause NOTE: the steering wheel heater to overheat. The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.

32 MIRRORS EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlights Heated Mirrors — If Equipped Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the instru- ment panel to the left of the steering wheel.

These mirrors are heated to melt Rotate the headlight switch to the first detent frost or ice. This feature will be for parking lights and to the second activated whenever you turn on the detent for headlights. rear window defroster (if equipped). Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To Equipped Know Your Vehicle” for further information. The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine is started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned on, the parking brake is applied, or the engine is shut Headlight Switch off.

1 — Rotate Headlight NOTE: 2 — Push Fog Light Switch If allowed by law in the country in which the 3 — Ambient Light Dimmer vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running 4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor- mation.

33 High Beams Automatic High Beams — If Equipped Parking Lights The Automatic High Beams system provides Rotate the headlight switch clock- Push the multifunction lever toward the in- increased forward lighting at night by auto- wise to the first detent for parking strument panel to switch the headlights to mating high beam control through the use of light and instrument panel light high beams. Pulling the multifunction back a digital camera mounted above the inside operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the toward the steering wheel will turn the low rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle second detent for headlight, parking light beams back on, or shut the high beams off. specific light and automatically switches and instrument panel light operation. from high beams to low beams until the Flash-To-Pass approaching vehicle is out of view. This fea- Headlight Delay You can signal another vehicle with your ture is activated by selecting “ON” under This feature provides the safety of headlight headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc- “Auto High Beam” within your Uconnect set- illumination for up to 90 seconds (program- tion lever toward you. This will cause the tings, as well as turning the headlight switch mable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit headlights to turn on at high beam and re- to the AUTO position. area. main on until the lever is released. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- To activate the delay feature, place the igni- Automatic Lighting dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor- tion in the OFF position while the headlights mation. are still on. Then, turn off the headlights Automatic Headlights — If Equipped within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: This system automatically turns your head- when the headlight switch is turned off. There is not an adjustable sensitivity level for lights on or off based on ambient light levels. this feature. If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, To turn the system on, turn the headlight or place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the switch to the extreme clockwise position The headlight switch is located on the instru- system will cancel the delay. aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the ment panel to the left of the steering wheel. headlight switch. When the system is on. To If you turn the headlights off before the When set to AUTO, the system automatically turn the Automatic System off, turn the head- ignition, they will turn off in the normal turns the headlights on or off based on am- light switch counterclockwise to the O (off) manner. position. bient light levels. 34 NOTE: An indicator light in the instrument cluster • When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal is activated, the Daytime • The lights must be turned off within 45 sec- display illuminates when the fog lights are Running Lamp will turn off on the side of onds of placing the ignition in the OFF turned on. the vehicle in which the turn signal is position to activate this feature. NOTE: flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will • The headlight delay time is programmable The fog lights will operate with the low beam turn back on when the turn signal is turned using the Uconnect System. Refer to headlights or parking lights on. However, se- off. “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in lecting the high beam headlights will turn off the Owner’s Manual for further information. the fog lights. Lane Change Assist Front Fog Lights TurnSignals Tap the lever up or down once, without mov- ing beyond the detent, and the turn signal The front fog light switch is built Move the multifunction lever up or down (right or left) will flash three times. Then, into the headlight switch. and the arrows on each side of the in- automatically turn off. strument cluster display flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and NOTE: push the headlight switch. To turn off the • If either light remains on and does not front fog lights, either push the headlight flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check switch a second time or turn off the headlight for a defective outside light bulb. If an switch. indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

35 WIPER AND WASHERS For information on the rear wiper/washer, Rain Sensing Wipers refer to “Rear Wiper” in this section. This feature senses moisture on the vehicle's Front Wiper Operation windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver when the switch is in the Intermittent, Low And High Operation intermittent position. The feature is espe- Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first cially useful for road splash or overspray from four detent positions for intermittent set- the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. tings, the fifth detent for low wiper operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to and the sixth detent for high wiper operation. one of four settings to activate this feature. Washer Operation Automatic Wiping Pull the lever rearward toward you and hold The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted for as long as spray is desired. with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay po- Mist sition one is the least sensitive, and wiper Multifunction Lever delay position four is the most sensitive. 1 — Push For Rear Washer Push the lever upward to the Mist position Setting three should be used for normal rain 2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper and release for a single wiping cycle. conditions. Settings one and two can be used

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3 — Rotate For Front Wiper NOTE: if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. The mist feature does not activate the washer Setting four can be used if the driver desires Front Wipers pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the sprayed on the windshield. The wash func- OFF position when not using the system. The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo- tion must be activated in order to spray the cated on the multifunction lever on the right NOTE: windshield with washer fluid. side of the steering column. The front wipers • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate are operated by rotating a switch, located on when the wiper switch is in the low or the end of the lever. high-speed position. 36 • The Rain Sensing feature may not function greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear Rear Washer Operation properly when ice or dried salt water is selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL Push the lever forward and hold while spray is present on the windshield. position. desired. Once the switch is released, it will • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles return to the OFF position and the wipers will silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor- equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain cycle several times before returning to the mance. Sensing wipers are not operational when the parked position. • The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the and off using the Uconnect System. Refer operator is in the vehicle and has placed the CAUTION! to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has Failure to follow these cautions can cause the Owner's Manual for further information. been selected, and no other inhibit condi- damage to the heating elements: The Rain Sensing system has protection fea- tions (mentioned previously) exist. • Use care when washing the inside of the tures for the wiper blades and arms, and will rear window. Do not use abrasive window Rear Wiper not operate under the following conditions: cleaners on the interior surface of the The rear wiper/washer controls are located on window. Use a soft cloth and a mild • Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni- washing solution, wiping parallel to the tion is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The rear heating elements. Labels can be peeled system will not operate until the wiper wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, off after soaking with warm water. switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, located at the middle of the lever. than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside tem- or abrasive window cleaners on the inte- perature is greater than 32°F (0°C). Rear Wiper Operation rior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When Rotate the center portion of the lever upward window. the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans- to the first detent for intermittent operation mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the and to the second detent for continuous rear Rain Sensing system will not operate until wiper operation. the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is

37 CLIMATE CONTROLS Climate Controls With A Touchscreen Overview GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display With Automatic Temperature Controls (If Equipped)

38 Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

39 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

40 Automatic Temperature Faceplate Controls

41 Climate Control With A Touchscreen Descriptions Icon Description

MAX A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

Recirculation Button Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. NOTE: • Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recir- culation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE use of this mode is not recommended. • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. AUTO Button — If Equipped Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this but- ton will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” in this section for more information.

42 Icon Description Front Defrost Button Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side win- FRONT dow demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi- mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front de- frost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting. Rear Defrost Button Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de- REAR froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes. Uconnect 3

Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touch- Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV screen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. NOTE: The numbers within the temperature display will only appear if the system is equipped with an automatic climate con- trol system.

SYNC Button — If Equipped Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature set- ting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

43 Icon Description Faceplate Knob Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. Touchscreen Buttons • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. • Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister out- lets.

44 Icon Description Mix Mode Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con- ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.

Climate Control Functions NOTE: MAX A/C

A/C (Air Conditioning) • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cool- side glass, select Defrost mode, and in- ing performance. The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the crease blower speed if needed. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C operator to manually activate or deactivate • If your air conditioning performance seems and the prior settings. The button illuminates the air conditioning system. When the air lower than expected, check the front of the when MAX A/C is on. conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu- A/C condenser (located in front of the ra- midified air will flow through the outlets into diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in- In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode posi- the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press sects. Clean with a gentle water spray from tion can be adjusted to desired user settings. the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning the front of the radiator and through the Pressing other settings will cause the MAX and manually adjust the blower and airflow condenser. A/C operation to switch to the selected set- mode settings. Also, make sure to select only ting and MAX A/C to exit. Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.

45 Recirculation 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would blower fan will remain on low until the engine like the system to maintain by adjusting warms up. The blower will increase in speed When outside air contains smoke, odors, or the driver and passenger temperature and transition into Auto mode. high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, control buttons. Once the desired tem- you may wish to recirculate interior air by perature is displayed, the system will Manual Operation Override pressing the Recirculation control button. achieve and automatically maintain that This system offers a full complement of The Recirculation indicator will illuminate comfort level. manual override features. The AUTO symbol when this button is selected. Press the but- 3. When the system is set up for your comfort in the front ATC display will be turned off ton a second time to turn off the Recircula- level, it is not necessary to change the when the system is being used in the manual tion mode and allow outside air into the settings. You will experience the greatest mode. vehicle. efficiency by simply allowing the system Operating Tips NOTE: to function automatically. In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode NOTE: Summer Operation may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable • It is not necessary to move the temperature The engine cooling system must be protected settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro- automatically adjusts the temperature, conditions exist that could create fogging on vide proper corrosion protection and to pro- mode, and blower speed to provide comfort the inside of the windshield. tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE as quickly as possible. (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. Winter Operation If Equipped or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable feature. Refer to To ensure the best possible heater and de- Automatic Operation the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” froster performance, make sure the engine in your Owner’s Manual for further 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, cooling system is functioning properly and information. or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the proper amount, type, and concentration the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) To provide you with maximum comfort in the Panel. Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the 46 of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recircula- Cabin Air Filter tion mode during Winter months is not rec- CAUTION! The climate control system filters out dust ommended, because it may cause window Failure to follow these cautions can cause and pollen from the air. Contact an autho- fogging. damage to the heating elements: rized dealer to service your cabin air filter, • Use care when washing the inside of Vacation/Storage and to have it replaced when needed. the rear window. Do not use abrasive Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of window cleaners on the interior surface service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, of the window. Use a soft cloth and a WINDOWS run the air conditioning system at idle for mild washing solution, wiping parallel Power Window Controls about five minutes, in fresh air with the to the heating elements. Labels can be blower setting on high. This will ensure ad- peeled off after soaking with warm The window controls on the driver's door equate system lubrication to minimize the water. control all the door windows. possibility of compressor damage when the • Do not use scrapers, sharp instru- system is started again. ments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Window Fogging • Keep all objects a safe distance from Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in the window. mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and Outside Air Intake increase the front blower speed. Do not use Make sure the air intake, located directly in the Recirculation mode without A/C for long front of the windshield, is free of obstruc- periods, as fogging may occur. tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. Power Window Switches 47 There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the WARNING! WARNING! passenger door windows. The window con- dows while operating the power window There is no anti-pinch protection when the trols will operate only when the ignition is in switches. Such entrapment may result in window is almost closed. To avoid personal the ACC or ON/RUN position. serious injury or death. injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window NOTE: Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch path before closing. For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the Protection power window switches will remain active for Reset Auto-Up up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled NOTE: to the OFF position. Opening either front door • If the window runs into any obstacle during Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the will cancel this feature. The time is program- auto-closure, it will reverse direction and window probably needs to be reset. To reset mable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in then go back down. Remove the obstacle Auto-Up: and use the window switch again to close “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for 1. Pull the window switch up to close the the window. further information. window completely and continue to hold • Any impact due to rough road conditions the switch up for an additional two sec- WARNING! may trigger the auto-reverse function unex- onds after the window is closed. pectedly during auto-closure. If this hap- 2. Push the window switch down firmly to GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Never leave children unattended in a ve- pens, pull the switch lightly and hold to hicle, and do not let children play with close the window manually. open the window completely and continue power windows. Do not leave the key fob in to hold the switch down for an additional or near the vehicle, or in a location acces- two seconds after the window is fully sible to children, and do not leave the open. ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended chil- dren, can become entrapped by the win-

48 Window Lockout Switch WARNING! The window lockout switch on the driver's vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or door trim panel allows you to disable the near the vehicle, or in a location acces- window controls on the rear passenger doors. sible to children. Do not leave the igni- To disable the window controls, push and tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless release the window lockout button (the indi- Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN cator light on the button with turn on). To mode. Occupants, particularly unat- enable the window controls, push and release tended children, can become entrapped the window lockout button again (the indica- by the power sunroof while operating the tor light on the button will turn back off). power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. POWER SUNROOF WITH • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an POWER SHADE — IF Power Sunroof Switches open sunroof. You could also be seri- EQUIPPED ously injured or killed. Always fasten 1 — Closing Sunroof your seat belt properly and make sure all The power sunroof switches are located to the 2 — Venting Sunroof passengers are also properly secured. left between the sun visors on the overhead 3 — Opening Sunroof • Do not allow small children to operate console. 4 — Opening Power Shade the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, 5 — Closing Power Shade The power shade switches are located to the other body parts, or any object, to proj- ect through the sunroof opening. Injury right between the sun visors on the overhead may result. console. WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked

49 Opening Sunroof to the full open position and automatically Manual Mode stop. Any release of the switch will stop the To close the sunroof, push and hold the The sunroof has two programmed open posi- sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain switch in the forward position. Any release of tions, comfort stop position and full open in a partially opened condition until the position. The comfort stop position is set to switch is pushed and held again. the switch will stop the movement and the minimize wind buffeting when driving with sunroof will remain in a partially closed con- side windows closed and sunroof open. If the Venting Sunroof dition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. sunshade is in the closed position when ini- Push and release the "Vent" button within tiating a sunroof open or vent command the one-half second and the sunroof will open to Wind Buffeting sunshade will automatically open to the half the vent position. This is called “Express open position prior to the sunroof opening. Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof Wind buffeting can be described as the per- Express position. During Express Vent operation, any ception of pressure on the ears or a movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve- Push the switch rearward and release it hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the Closing Sunroof within one-half second, the sunroof will open windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in to the comfort stop position and automati- Express certain open or partially open positions. This cally stop. Push the switch rearward and is a normal occurrence and can be mini- release it again, the sunroof will open to the Push the switch forward and release it within mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear full open position and automatically stop. one-half second and the sunroof will close GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE windows open, then open the front and rear This is called “Express Open”. During Ex- automatically from any position. The sunroof windows together to minimize the buffeting. press Open operation, any movement of the will close fully and stop automatically. This is sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. called “Express Close”. During Express Close If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, operation, any other actuation of the switch adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the Manual Mode will stop the sunroof. buffeting or open any window. Push and hold the switch rearward, the sun- roof will open to the comfort stop position and automatically stop. Push the switch rear- ward and hold it again, the sunroof will open 50 Opening Power Shade shade will open automatically to the full-open and sunshade completely. This is called “Ex- position. Any release of the switch will stop press Close”. During Express Close opera- The sunshade has two programmed open po- the movement and the sunshade will remain tion, any movement of the switch will stop the sitions, half open and full open positions. in a partially opened condition until the sunshade. When opening the sunshade from the closed switch is pushed again. position the sunshade will always stop at the Manual half open position regardless of express or Closing Power Shade Push and hold the sunshade switch forward. manual open operation. The switch must be If the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade If the sunroof is in closed position the sun- actuated again to continue on to full open cannot be closed beyond the half open posi- shade will full close from any position. If the position. tion. Pressing the sunshade close switch sunroof is open or vented the sunshade will Express when the sunroof is open/vented and the close to the half open position and stop; pushing and holding the sunshade switch Push the sunshade switch rearward and re- sunshade is at half open position will first forward again will close both the sunroof and lease it within one-half second, the sunshade automatically close sunroof prior to the sun- will open to the half open position and stop shade closing. sunshade completely. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sun- automatically. Push and release the switch Express again from the half open position and the shade will remain in a partially closed condi- sunshade will open to the full open position Push the sunshade switch forward and re- tion until the switch is pushed again. and stop automatically. This is called “Ex- lease it within one-half second. If the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature press Open”. During Express Open operation, is in closed position the sunshade will full any movement of the sunshade switch will close automatically from any position. If the This feature will detect an obstruction in the stop the shade. sunroof is open or vented the sunshade will closing of the sunroof during the Express Manual Mode close to the half open position and stop; push Close operation. If an obstruction in the path and release the sunshade switch forward of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, again to automatically close both the sunroof automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- the shade will open to the half open position tion if this occurs. and stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward again and the 51 NOTE: HOOD Closing The Hood If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Pro- Opening The Hood Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches tect will disable and the sunroof must be (30 cm) from the engine compartment and closed in Manual Mode. Two latches must be released to open the hood. drop it. Make sure that the hood is com- pletely closed. 1. Pull the hood release lever located under Sunroof Maintenance the driver’s side of the instrument panel. WARNING! Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and cloth to clean the glass panel. pull the safety latch release lever forward Be sure the hood is fully latched before Ignition Off Operation (toward you). The safety latch release le- driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully ver is located behind the front edge of the latched, it could open when the vehicle is The power sunroof switch will remain active hood, slightly off-center to the right. in motion and block your vision. Failure to for up to approximately 10 minutes after the follow this warning could result in serious ignition switch is turned to the OFF/LOCK injury or death. position. Opening either front door will can- cel this feature. CAUTION! NOTE: To prevent possible damage, do not slam

GETTING TO KNOW YOURIgnition VEHICLE Off time is programmable through the hood to close it. Lower hood to approxi- the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect mately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s hood to close. Make sure hood is fully Manual for further information. closed for both latches. Never drive ve- hicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location

52 LIFTGATE The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release Opening switch. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the To Unlock/Open The Liftgate electronic liftgate release switch to open with The power liftgate may be opened by pushing one fluid motion. the electronic liftgate release switch (refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” lo- NOTE: cated in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”) or If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro- by pushing the liftgate button on the key fob. grammed in instrument cluster display, all Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice doors will unlock when you push the elec- within five seconds to open the power lift- tronic release on the liftgate. If "Unlock gate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in button twice within five seconds a second Uconnect, the liftgate will unlock when you time will close the liftgate. push the electronic release on the liftgate. Liftgate Entry Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- The power liftgate may also be opened or dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor- Closing closed by pushing the liftgate button located mation. There are several different ways to close the on the instrument panel to right of the head- liftgate: light control switch assembly. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed by • Manually by grasping the liftgate closing pushing the liftgate button located on the left handle and initiate lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate takes rear trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If over the closing effort. the liftgate is in motion, pushing the liftgate button located on the left rear trim panel will • Key Fob reverse the liftgate. • Hands-Free

53 • Liftgate Instrument Panel Button Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped • Power Liftgate Button On The Pillar In The Cargo Area To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock/push but- ton located to the left of the back-up camera will lock the vehicle only. The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the button, located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing button will only close the liftgate. This button cannot be used Rear Power Liftgate Switch to open the liftgate. NOTE: Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone The liftgate unlock feature is built into the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE electronic liftgate release. To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle activation zone in the general location below the rear license plate. Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not de- tect the motion.

54 NOTE: NOTE: • The power liftgate will release, but not Activation zone is the same for vehicles The Hands-free liftgate feature can be acti- power open, in temperatures below −12° F equipped with and without trailer tow pack- vated by any metallic object making a similar (−24° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of age. in-and-out motion under the rear bumper, snow or ice from the liftgate before opening such as cleaning using a metal broom. the liftgate. When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will NOTE: • If the liftgate is left open for an extended flash and the liftgate will open after approxi- period of time, the liftgate may need to be • The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate mately one second, or close after approxi- closed manually to reset power liftgate when the transmission is in PARK. mately three seconds. This assumes all op- functionality. tions are enabled in the radio. • If anything obstructs the Hands-Free lift- gate while it is opening or closing, the WARNING! NOTE: liftgate will automatically reverse to the • Driving with the liftgate open can allow • Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate closed/open position, provided it meets poisonous exhaust gases into your ve- requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within sufficient resistance. hicle. You and your passengers could be 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid • There are pinch sensors attached to the injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft side of the liftgate opening. Light pressure closed when you are operating the ve- (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any anywhere along these strips will cause the hicle. kicks. liftgate to return to the open position. • If you are required to drive with the • The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be • If the power liftgate encounters multiple liftgate open, make sure that all win- turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer obstructions within the same cycle, the dows are closed, and the climate control to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in system will automatically stop. If this oc- blower switch is set at high speed. Do the Owner’s Manual for further information. curs, the liftgate must be operated manu- not use the recirculation mode. The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be ally. turned off during Jacking, Tire Changing, Manual Car Wash, and Vehicle Service.

55 Gas props support the liftgate in the open UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR are programmed to with each press of the position. However, because the gas pressure corresponding HomeLink button. drops with temperature, it may be necessary OPENER (HOMELINK) • The HomeLink indicator light is located to assist the props when opening the liftgate above the center button. in cold weather. Before YouBegin Programming NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. HomeLink Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may For efficient programming and accurate activate the liftgate obstacle detection fea- transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it ture and stop the power operation or reverse is recommended that a new battery be placed its direction. in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink WARNING! system. Make sure your hand-held transmit- HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light During power operation, personal injury or ter is programmed to activate the device you cargo damage may occur. Ensure the lift- • HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held are trying to program your HomeLink button gate travel path is clear. Make sure the transmitters that operate devices such as to. liftgate is closed and latched before driv- garage door openers, motorized gates, Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ing away. lighting or home security systems. The the garage before you begin programming. HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. It is recommended that you erase all the • The HomeLink buttons that are located on channels of your HomeLink before you use it the sunvisor designate the three different for the first time. HomeLink channels. If you have any problems, or require assis- • To operate HomeLink, push and release any tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 of the programmed HomeLink buttons. or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for in- These buttons will activate the devices they formation or assistance. 56 Erasing All The HomeLink Channels rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN “TRAIN” button located where the antenna is position. To erase the channels, follow this procedure: attached to the device. The button may not 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN be immediately visible when looking at the 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the position. device. The name and color of the button may HomeLink button you wish to program, 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink vary slightly by manufacturer. while keeping the HomeLink indicator buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or NOTE: light in view. until the HomeLink indicator light flashes. The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the 3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold NOTE: button you normally use to operate the de- the garage door opener transmitter button Erasing all channels should only be per- vice. you are trying to replicate. formed when programming HomeLink for the Non-rolling Code Devices first time. Do not erase channels when pro- 4. Continue to hold both buttons and ob- Most devices manufactured before 1995 will gramming additional buttons. serve the HomeLink indicator light. The not have a rolling code. These devices will HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly Identifying Whether YouHave A Rolling also not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. and then rapidly. Once this happens, re- Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device Programming HomeLink ToA Garage lease both buttons. Before programming a device to one of your Door Opener NOTE: Make sure the garage door opener motor is HomeLink buttons, you must determine To program any of the HomeLink buttons to plugged in before moving on to the rolling whether the device has a rolling code or activate your garage door opener motor, fol- code/non-rolling code final steps. non-rolling code. low the steps below: Rolling Code Devices Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps NOTE: To determine if your device has a rolling code, All HomeLink buttons are programmed using NOTE: a good indicator is its manufacturing date. this procedure. You do not need to erase all You have 30 seconds in which to initiate Typically, devices manufactured after channels when programming additional but- rolling code final step 2, after completing 1995 have rolling codes. A device with a tons. rolling code final step 1. 57 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the 2. Push the programmed HomeLink button Programming HomeLink ToA garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” to confirm that the garage door opener Miscellaneous Device button. This can usually be found where motor operates. If the garage door opener the hanging antenna wire is attached to motor does not operate, repeat the steps Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Ga- the garage door opener motor. Firmly push from the beginning. rage Door Opener” for the procedure on how and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” to program HomeLink to a miscellaneous button. WARNING! device, as it follows the same procedure. Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling 2. Return to the vehicle and push the pro- • Your motorized door or gate will open code, or non-rolling code before beginning grammed HomeLink button three times and close while you are programming the programming process. (holding the button for two seconds each the universal transceiver. Do not pro- time). If the garage door opener motor gram the transceiver if people or pets are NOTE: operates, programming is complete. in the path of the door or gate. Canadian radio frequency laws require trans- mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after sev- 3. Push the programmed HomeLink button • Do not run your vehicle in a closed eral seconds of transmission, which may not to confirm that the garage door opener garage or confined area while program- be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the motor operates. If the garage door opener ming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide signal during programming. Similar to this motor does not operate, repeat the final (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are steps for the rolling code procedure.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when in- designed to time-out in the same manner. Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final haled and can cause you and others to The procedure may need to be preformed Steps be severely injured or killed. multiple times to successfully pair the device 1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink to your HomeLink buttons. button and observe the HomeLink indicator light. If the HomeLink indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete.

58 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink General Information INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Button The following regulatory statement applies to Power Outlets To reprogram a single HomeLink button that all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in has been previously trained, without erasing this vehicle: Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt all the channels, follow the procedure below. (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Be sure to determine whether the new device power cellular phones, small electronics and Rules and with Industry Canada license- you want to program the HomeLink button to other low powered electrical accessories. The has a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code. exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- power outlets are labeled with either a “key” ject to the following two conditions: or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN posi- outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with tion, without starting the engine. 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- ference, and a “key” are powered when the ignition switch 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink but- is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets ton until the HomeLink Indicator light 2. This device must accept any interference labeled with a “battery” are connected di- begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not received, including interference that may rectly to the battery and powered at all times. release the button. cause undesired operation. NOTE: 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with NOTE: Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A • All accessories connected to the “battery” Changes or modifications not expressly ap- powered outlets should be removed or Garage Door Opener” and follow all re- proved by the party responsible for compli- turned off when the vehicle is not in use to maining steps. ance could void the user’s authority to oper- protect the battery against discharge. ate the equipment. CAUTION!

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use

59 In addition to the front power outlet, there is CAUTION! also a power outlet located in the storage area of the power outlet can cause damage not of the center console. covered by your New Vehicle Limited War- ranty.

The front power outlet is located inside the storage area in front of the shifter.

Rear Cargo Power Outlet

NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed Center Console Power Outlet to “battery” powered all the time by switch- A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located ing the power outlet Power Distribution Cen- on the left quarter trim panel in the cargo ter panel fuse from fuse location F91 to F81. area. This power outlet has power available

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.

Front Power Outlet

60 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all times) 2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position) 3 — F60 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console

61 convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can WARNING! CAUTION! power cellular phones, electronics and other low To avoid serious injury or death: • After the use of high power draw accesso- power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end game consoles exceed this • Only devices designed for use in this ries, or long periods of the vehicle not power limit, as will most power tools. type of outlet should be inserted into any being started (with accessories still 12 Volt outlet. plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply • Do not touch with wet hands. sufficient length of time to allow the gen- plug in the device. The outlet automatically • Close the lid when not in use and while erator to recharge the vehicle's battery. turns off when the device is unplugged. driving the vehicle. Power Inverter — If Equipped The power inverter is designed with built-in • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause overload protection. If the power rating of an electric shock and failure. 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter automatically shuts down. Once the electri- CAUTION! cal device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To • Many accessories that can be plugged in avoid overloading the circuit, check the draw power from the vehicle's battery, power ratings on electrical devices prior to even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, using the inverter. etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE enough, the vehicle's battery will dis- WARNING! charge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. To avoid serious injury or death: • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., • Do not insert any objects into the coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) receptacles. will degrade the battery even more • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use. quickly. Only use these intermittently Rear Center Console Power Inverter • If this outlet is mishandled, it may and with greater caution. There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet cause an electric shock and failure. located on the back of the center console to 62 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER The instrument cluster display menu items DISPLAY consist of the following: • Speedometer Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru- • Vehicle Info ment cluster display, which offers useful in- formation to the driver. With the ignition in • Driver Assist — If Equipped the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a • Fuel Economy door will activate the display for viewing, and • Trip display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is • Stop/Start designed to display important information • Audio about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on • Messages the instrument panel, your instrument cluster • Screen Setup display can show you how systems are work- Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons The system allows the driver to select infor- ing and give you warnings when they aren’t. 1 — Left Arrow 4 — OK Button mation by pushing the following buttons The steering wheel mounted controls allow Button you to scroll through and enter the main mounted on the steering wheel: 2 — Up Arrow 5 — Down Arrow menus and submenus. You can access the Button Button specific information you want and make se- 3 — Right Arrow lections and adjustments. Button Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls • Up Arrow Button Push and release the up arrow button to The instrument cluster display features a scroll upward through the main menu and driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. submenus. 63 • Down Arrow Button Oil Change Reset — If Equipped 2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle Push and release the down arrow button to Info" in the instrument cluster display. Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil scroll downward through the main menu change indicator system. The “Oil Change 3. Push and hold the OK button until the and submenus. Required” message will display in the instru- gauge resets to 100%. • Right Arrow Button ment cluster display for five seconds after a Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Proce- Push and release the right arrow button to single chime has sounded to indicate the dure access the information screens or submenu next scheduled oil change interval. The en- screens of a main menu item. gine oil change indicator system is duty cycle 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push based, which means the engine oil change and release the ENGINE START/STOP • Left Arrow Button interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your button and place the ignition to the ON/ Push and release the left arrow button to personal driving style. RUN position (do not start the engine). access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Unless reset, this message will continue to 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, display each time you cycle the ignition to the three times within ten seconds. • OK Button ON/RUN position. To turn off the message 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push Push the OK button to access/select the temporarily, push and release the OK button. and release the ENGINE START/STOP information screens or submenu screens of To reset the oil change indicator system (after button once to return the ignition to the a main menu item. Push and hold the OK performing the scheduled maintenance), re- button to reset displayed/selected features fer to the following procedure. OFF/LOCK position. that can be reset. Oil Life Reset NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator and release the ENGINE START/STOP system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this button and place the ignition to the ON/ procedure. RUN position (do not start the engine). GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

64 Instrument Cluster Display Selectable In cases when the IBS detects charging sys- NOTE: Items tem failure, or the vehicle battery conditions • The charging system is independent from are deteriorating, electrical load reduction load reduction. The charging system per- The instrument cluster display can be used to actions will take place to extend the driving forms a diagnostic on the charging system view the following main menu items: time and distance of the vehicle. This is done continuously. Speedometer Stop/Start by reducing power to or turning off non- • If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it Vehicle Info Audio essential electrical loads. may indicate a problem with the charging Driver Assist Messages Load reduction is only active when the engine system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning Fuel Economy Screen Setup is running. It will display a message if there is Light” in “Warning Lights And Messages” Trip a risk of battery depletion to the point where located in this section for further information. the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical NOTE: supply, or will not restart after the current The electrical loads that may be switched off Depending on the vehicles options, feature drive cycle. (if equipped), and vehicle functions which settings may vary. Refer to the “Instrument can be effected by load reduction: Cluster Display” in “Getting To know Your When load reduction is activated, the mes- • Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for sage “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver further information. Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster • Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped display. • Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode These messages indicate the vehicle battery Message — Electrical Load Reduction • HVAC System has a low state of charge and continues to Actions — If Equipped • 150W Power Inverter System lose electrical charge at a rate that the charg- This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent ing system cannot sustain. • Audio and Telematics System Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.

65 Loss of the battery charge may indicate one • The battery was used for an extended pe- • Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, or more of the following conditions: riod with the engine not running to supply driving time and parking time). radio, lights, chargers, +12V portable ap- • The charging system cannot deliver enough • The vehicle should have service performed pliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game con- electrical power to the vehicle system be- if the message is still present during con- soles and similar devices. cause the electrical loads are larger than secutive trips and the evaluation of the the capability of charging system. The What to do when an electrical load reduction vehicle and driving pattern did not help to charging system is still functioning prop- action message is present (“Battery Saver On” identify the cause. erly. or “Battery Saver Mode”) WARNING LIGHTS AND • Turning on all possible vehicle electrical During a trip: loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior MESSAGES and interior lights, overloaded power out- • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if pos- lets +12V, 150W, USB ports) during certain sible: The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in driving conditions (city driving, towing, fre- – Turn off redundant lights (interior or the instrument panel together with a dedi- quent stopping). exterior). cated message and/or acoustic signal when – Check what may be plugged in to power applicable. These indications are indicative • Installing options like additional lights, up- outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports. and precautionary and as such must not be fitter electrical accessories, audio systems, – Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera- considered as exhaustive and/or alternative alarms and similar devices. ture). to the information contained in the Owner’s • Unusual driving cycles (short trips sepa- – Check the audio settings (volume). Manual, which you are advised to read care- rated by long parking periods). fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa- After a trip: • The vehicle was parked for an extended tion in this chapter in the event of a failure period of time (weeks, months). • Check if any aftermarket equipment was indication. All active telltales will display first • The battery was recently replaced and was installed (additional lights, upfitter electri- if applicable. The system check menu may cal accessories, audio systems, alarms) appear different based upon equipment op-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL not charged completely. and review specifications if any (load and tions and current vehicle status. Some tell- • The battery was discharged by an electrical Ignition Off Draw currents). tales are optional and may not appear. load left on when the vehicle was parked. 66 Red Warning Lights — Brake Warning Light cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the This light monitors various brake functions, — Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light master cylinder has dropped below a speci- including brake fluid level and parking brake fied level. This light indicates when the driver or passen- application. If the brake light turns on it may ger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is indicate that the parking brake is applied, The light will remain on until the cause is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN that the brake fluid level is low, or that there corrected. position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuck- is a problem with the anti-lock brake system NOTE: led, a chime will sound and the light will turn reservoir. on. When driving, if the driver or front passen- The light may flash momentarily during sharp ger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt If the light remains on when the parking cornering maneuvers, which change fluid Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu- brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have ously and a chime will sound. level is at the full mark on the master cylinder service performed, and the brake fluid level reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy- checked. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in draulic system malfunction or that a problem If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair “Safety” for further information. with the Brake Booster has been detected by is necessary. — Air Bag Warning Light the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec- tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this This light indicates a fault with the air bag, and case, the light will remain on until the condi- WARNING! will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb tion has been corrected. If the problem is Driving a vehicle with the red brake light check when the ignition is placed in the ON/ related to the brake booster, the ABS pump on is dangerous. Part of the brake system RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will will run when applying the brake, and a brake may have failed. It will take longer to stop illuminate with a single chime when a fault pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. the vehicle. You could have a collision. with the air bag has been detected, it will stay Have the vehicle checked immediately. on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either The dual brake system provides a reserve not on during startup, stays on, or turns on braking capacity in the event of a failure to a Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake while driving, have the system inspected at an portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec- authorized dealer as soon as possible. either half of the dual brake system is indi- tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the 67 event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning — Battery Charge Warning Light Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. WARNING! This light illuminates when the battery is not Immediate repair to the ABS system is re- charging properly. If it stays on while the Continued operation with reduced assist quired. could pose a safety risk to yourself and engine is running, there may be a malfunc- others. Service should be obtained as soon Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be tion with the charging system. Contact your as possible. checked by turning the ignition switch from authorized dealer as soon as possible. the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately This indicates a possible problem with the two seconds. The light should then turn off electrical system or a related component. — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) unless the parking brake is applied or a brake Warning Light — Door Open Warning Light fault is detected. If the light does not illumi- This warning light will illuminate to inform of nate, have the light inspected by your autho- This indicator will illuminate when a door is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Con- rized dealer. ajar/open and not fully closed. trol (ETC) system. If a problem is detected The light also will turn on when the parking NOTE: while the vehicle is running, the light will brake is applied with the ignition switch in If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a either stay on or flash depending on the the ON/RUN position. single chime. nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely NOTE: — Electric Power Steering Fault This light shows only that the parking brake is stopped and the transmission is placed in the Warning Light applied. It does not show the degree of brake PARK position. The light should turn off. If application. This light will turn on when there's a fault the light remains on with the vehicle running, with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) sys- your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, tem. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL further information. NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time. 68 If the light continues to flash when the ve- — Hood Open Warning Light — Oil Temperature Warning Light hicle is running, immediate service is re- This indicator will illuminate when the hood This warning light will illuminate to indicate quired and you may experience reduced per- is left open and not fully closed. the engine oil temperature is high. If the light formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and stall and your vehicle may require towing. The NOTE: shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait light will come on when the ignition is placed If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a for oil temperature to return to normal levels. in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and single chime. remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light — Liftgate Open Warning Light — Transmission Temperature Warning does not come on during starting, have the Light — If Equipped system checked by an authorized dealer. This indicator light will illuminate when the liftgate is open. This warning light will illuminate to warn of a — Engine Coolant Temperature Warn- high transmission fluid temperature. This may ing Light NOTE: occur with strenuous usage such as trailer If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle This light warns of an overheated engine single chime. and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, condition. If the engine coolant temperature — Oil Pressure Warning Light with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a until the light turns off. Once the light turns single chime will sound. This warning light will illuminate to indicate off, you may continue to drive normally. low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on If the light turns on while driving, safely pull while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is the engine as soon as possible. A chime will WARNING! on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission sound when this light turns on. into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the If you continue operating the vehicle when temperature reading does not return to nor- Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to mal, turn the engine off immediately and call corrected. This light does not indicate how boil over, come in contact with hot engine or for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Over- much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level exhaust components and cause a fire. heats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further must be checked under the hood. information. 69 — Electronic Park Brake Warning — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) CAUTION! Light Active Warning Light — If Equipped Continuous driving with the Transmission This warning light will illuminate to indicate This light will indicate when the Electronic Temperature Warning Light illuminated the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC will eventually cause severe transmission properly and service is required. Contact an Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will damage or transmission failure. authorized dealer. come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning ESC is activated. It should go out with the — Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Light Equipped engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys- comes on continuously with the engine run- This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- tem (ABS). The light will turn on when the ning, a malfunction has been detected in the mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ ESC system. If this light remains on after alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly RUN position and may stay on for as long as several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has until the vehicle is disarmed. four seconds. been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see YellowWarning Lights If the ABS light remains on or turns on while your authorized dealer as soon as possible to driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault have the problem diagnosed and corrected. brake system is not functioning and service is Warning Light — If Equipped required as soon as possible. However, the • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the This warning light will illuminate to indicate conventional brake system will continue to “ESC Indicator Light” come on momen- a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local operate normally, assuming the Brake Warn- tarily each time the ignition is placed in the authorized dealer for service. ing Light is not also on. ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. For further information, refer to “Adaptive If the ABS light does not turn on when the • The ESC system will make buzzing or click- ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;

GETTING TO KNOW YOURCruise INSTRUMENT PANEL Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Oper- ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ the sounds will stop when ESC becomes ating.” RUN position, have the brake system in- inactive. spected by an authorized dealer. 70 • This light will come on when the vehicle is — Service LaneSense Warning Light If the bulb does not come on when turning the in an ESC event. — If Equipped ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This warning light will illuminate when the Off Warning Light — If Equipped LaneSense system is not operating and re- Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing quires service. Please see an authorized gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illumi- This light indicates the Electronic Stability dealer. nate the light after engine start. The vehicle Control (ESC) is off. should be serviced if the light stays on — LaneSense Warning Light — If Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN through several typical driving styles. In most or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, Equipped situations, the vehicle will drive normally and even if it was turned off previously. The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid will not require towing. yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane — Low Fuel Warning Light When the engine is running, the MIL may flash marker. The warning light will flash when the to alert serious conditions that could lead to When the fuel level reaches approximately vehicle is crossing the lane marker. immediate loss of power or severe catalytic 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light will turn on, and Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Start- converter damage. The vehicle should be ser- remain on until fuel is added. ing And Operating” for further information. viced as soon as possible if this occurs. A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning. — Engine Check/Malfunction Indica- WARNING! tor Warning Light (MIL) — Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped referenced above, can reach higher tem- (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic Sys- peratures than in normal operating condi- This warning light will illuminate when the tem called OBD II that monitors engine and tions. This can cause a fire if you drive windshield washer fluid is low. automatic transmission control systems. This slowly or park over flammable substances warning light will illuminate when the ignition such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

71 Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in Should one or more tires be in the condition CAUTION! "Safety" for further information. mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in Prolonged driving with the Malfunction — Service Stop/Start System Warning Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam- sequence. Light age to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/ CAUTION! If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic Start system is not functioning properly and Do not continue driving with one or more converter damage and power loss will soon service is required. Contact an authorized flat tires as handling may be compro- occur. Immediate service is required. dealer for service. mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp — Speed Control Fault Warning Light braking and steering. If a tire puncture SERV 4WD — Service 4WD Warning Light — If occurs, repair immediately using the dedi- This warning light will illuminate to indicate Equipped cated tire repair kit and contact your au- the Speed Control System is not functioning thorized dealer as soon as possible. This warning light will illuminate to signal a properly and service is required. Contact an fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays authorized dealer. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), on or comes on during driving, it means that should be checked monthly when cold and — Tire Pressure Monitoring System the 4WD system is not functioning properly inflated to the inflation pressure recom- and that service is required. We recommend (TPMS) Warning Light mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the you drive to the nearest service center and The warning light switches on and a message vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- have the vehicle serviced immediately. is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different is lower than the recommended value and/or size than the size indicated on the vehicle — Service Forward Collision Warn- that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these placard or tire inflation pressure label, you ing (FCW) Light — If Equipped cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con- should determine the proper tire inflation This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in sumption may not be guaranteed. pressure for those tires.) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the Forward Collision Warning System. Con- tact your local authorized dealer for service. 72 As an added safety feature, your vehicle has flash for approximately one minute and then been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- remain continuously illuminated. This se- CAUTION! ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire quence will continue upon subsequent ve- of the same size, type, and/or style. After- pressure telltale when one or more of your hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction market wheels can cause sensor damage. tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- exists. When the malfunction indicator is Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- illuminated, the system may not be able to (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af- minates, you should stop and check your tires detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is as soon as possible, and inflate them to the TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of recommended that you take your vehicle to proper pressure. Driving on a significantly reasons, including the installation of replace- your authorized dealer to have your sensor under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve- function checked. and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc- YellowIndicator Lights life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling tion telltale after replacing one or more tires and stopping ability. or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the — Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator replacement or alternate tires and wheels Light — If Equipped Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute allow the TPMS to continue to function This warning light will illuminate to signal for proper tire maintenance, and it is the properly. driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire when there is a fault detected with the Active pressure, even if under-inflation has not CAUTION! Speed Limiter. reached the level to trigger illumination of the — Forward Collision Warning Off Indi- TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. cator Light — If Equipped Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS pressures and warning have been This light indicates that Forward Collision TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when established for the tire size equipped on Warning is off. the system is not operating properly. The your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- TPMS malfunction indicator is combined tion or sensor damage may result when with the low tire pressure telltale. When the using replacement equipment that is not system detects a malfunction, the telltale will 73 — 4WD Low Indicator Light — If — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set — LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped With Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is This will display when the ACC is set and a The LaneSense indicator is solid green when in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive both lane markings have been detected and and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Oper- the system is “armed” and ready to provide together forcing the front and rear wheels to ating” for further information. visual and torque warnings if an uninten- rotate at the same speed. Low range provides tional lane departure occurs. — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in- Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in creased torque at the wheels. Without Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped “Starting And Operating” for further informa- Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If This will display the distance setting for the tion. Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for ACC system when the system is engaged. — Park/Headlight On Indicator Light further information on four-wheel drive op- Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa- eration and proper use. This indicator light will illuminate when the tion. park lights or headlights are turned on. — Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — Stop/Start Active Indicator Light This light indicates when the rear axle lock — If Equipped has been activated. This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/ This indicator light will illuminate when the Start function is in “Autostop” mode. Green Indicator Lights speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And — Turn Signal Indicator Lights — Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Operating” for further information. When the left or right turn signal is activated, Light the turn signal indicator will flash indepen- — Front Fog Indicator Light — If This light will turn on when the Active Speed dently and the corresponding exterior turn Equipped GETTING TO KNOW YOURLimiter INSTRUMENT PANEL is on and set to a specific speed. signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be This indicator light will illuminate when the activated when the multifunction lever is front fog lights are on. moved down (left) or up (right). 74 NOTE: button has been selected. Refer to “Adaptive Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Start- • A continuous chime will sound if the ve- Cruise Control” in “Starting And Operating” ing And Operating” for further information. for further information. hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) — Passive Speed Limiter Engaged with either turn signal on. — Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator The indication light up white along with a • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb Light — If Equipped notification text message (speed warning set if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. This indicator shows when the Hill Descent to xx followed by unit). When the set speed is White Indicator Lights Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp just exceeded, a single chime will sound will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can along with pop up message of speed warning — Active Speed Limiter ON Indicator only be armed when the transfer case is in the exceeded. When the set speed is exceeded by Light — If Equipped “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed 2 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will This light will turn on when the Active Speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these light up yellow and flash along with a continu- Limiter is on, but not set. conditions are not met while attempting to ous chime (up to 10 seconds or until the use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light speed is no longer exceeded). / — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will flash on/off. Ready Light — If Equipped NOTE: This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise — LaneSense Indicator Light — If The number “31” is only an example of a Control (ACC) has been turned on, but is not Equipped speed that can be select. set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control ” in When the LaneSense system is ON, but not — Selec Speed Control Indicator “Starting And Operating” for further informa- armed, the LaneSense indicator is solid Light — If Equipped tion. white. This occurs when only left, right, or This light will turn on when “Selec Speed neither lane line has been detected. If a — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Control” is activated. Light — If Equipped single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual warnings if an To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the This light will turn on when the vehicle unintentional lane departure occurs on the vehicle is Four Wheel Drive Low (4WD) and equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) detected lane line. push the button on the Instrument Panel. has reached the speed desired and the set 75 NOTE: ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC CAUTION! If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter SYSTEM — OBD II Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could in the instrument cluster display. Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated cause further damage to the emission Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. control system. It could also affect fuel — Cruise Control Ready Indicator This system monitors the performance of the economy and driveability. The vehicle Light emissions, engine, and transmission control must be serviced before any emissions This light will turn on when the speed control systems. When these systems are operating tests can be performed. has been turned on, but not set. Refer to properly, your vehicle will provide excellent • If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is “Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting performance and fuel economy, as well as running, severe catalytic converter dam- And Operating” for further information. engine emissions well within current govern- age and power loss will soon occur. Im- ment regulations. mediate service is required. Blue Indicator Lights If any of these systems require service, the — High Beam Indicator Light OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag- Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) This indicator light will illuminate to indicate nostic codes and other information to assist Cybersecurity that the high beam headlights are on. With your service technician in making repairs. Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard the low beams activated, push the multifunc- Although your vehicle will usually be drivable Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection tion lever forward (toward the front of the and not need towing, see an authorized port to allow access to information related to vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the dealer for service as soon as possible. the performance of your emissions controls. multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear Authorized service technicians may need to of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If access this information to assist with the the high beams are off, pull the lever toward diagnosis and service of your vehicle and you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to emissions system. GETTING TO KNOW YOURpass" INSTRUMENT PANEL scenario.

76 Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated WARNING! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE test, which you can use prior to going to the • ONLY an authorized service technician test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II should connect equipment to the OBD II PROGRAMS system is ready, you must do the following: connection port in order to diagnose or In some localities, it may be a legal require- 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi- service your vehicle. ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's tion, but do not crank or start the engine. • If unauthorized equipment is connected emissions control system. Failure to pass to the OBD II connection port, such as a could prevent vehicle registration. NOTE: driver-behavior tracking device, it may: If you crank or start the engine, you will • Be possible that vehicle systems, For states that require an Inspec- have to start this test over. including safety related systems, tion and Maintenance (I/M), this 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to could be impaired or a loss of ve- check verifies the “Malfunction the ON position, you will see the “Mal- hicle control could occur that may Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol result in an accident involving seri- not on when the engine is running, and that ous injury or death. the OBD II system is ready for testing. come on as part of a normal bulb check. • Access, or allow others to access, Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of information stored in your vehicle The OBD II system may not be ready if your two things will happen: systems, including personal infor- vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a • The MIL will flash for about ten seconds mation. dead battery or a battery replacement. If the and then return to being fully illuminated OBD II system should be determined not For further information, refer to “Cybersecu- until you turn OFF the ignition or start the ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail rity” in “Multimedia”. engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD the test. II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

77 • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the igni- tion in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II sys- tem is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the sys- tem is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi- nated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before go- ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

78 • Brake pedal pulsations. SAFETY FEATURES WARNING! • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end condition of the vehicle brakes and tires Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) of the stop. or the traction afforded. The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides These are all normal characteristics of ABS. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in- increased vehicle stability and brake perfor- cluding those resulting from excessive mance under most braking conditions. The WARNING! speed in turns, following another vehicle system automatically prevents wheel lock, too closely, or hydroplaning. and enhances vehicle control during braking. • The ABS contains sophisticated elec- • The capabilities of an ABS equipped tronic equipment that may be suscep- vehicle must never be exploited in a The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en- tible to interference caused by improp- reckless or dangerous manner that could sure that the ABS is working properly each erly installed or high output radio jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety time the vehicle is started and driven. During transmitting equipment. This interfer- of others. this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock sound as well as some related motor noises. braking capability. Installation of such ABS is designed to function with the OEM ABS is activated during braking when the equipment should be performed by tires. Modification may result in degraded system detects one or more wheels begin to qualified professionals. ABS performance. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the or panic stops may increase the likelihood of The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” stopping distance longer. Just press ABS activation(s). will turn on when the ignition is turned to the firmly on your brake pedal when you ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as You also may experience the following when need to slow down or stop. four seconds. ABS activates: • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re- • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to nor can it increase braking or steering mains on or comes on while driving, it indi- run for a short time after the stop). efficiency beyond that afforded by the cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. system is not functioning and that service is 79 required. However, the conventional brake Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control Brake Assist System (BAS) system will continue to operate normally if (HDC), and Selec-Speed Control (SSC). The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) braking capability during emergency braking

SAFETY If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, maneuvers. The system detects an emer- This function manages the distribution of the the brake system should be serviced as soon braking torque between the front and rear gency braking situation by sensing the rate as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear and amount of brake application and then brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This Light” does not come on when the ignition is rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to can help reduce braking distances. The BAS turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light prevent the rear axle from entering ABS be- complements the anti-lock brake system repaired as soon as possible. fore the front axle. (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re- sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive Electronic Brake Control System Brake System Warning Light the benefit of the system, you must apply Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced The red “Brake System Warning Light” will continuous braking pressure during the stop- Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This turn on when the ignition is turned to the ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). system includes Electronic Brake Force Dis- ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless tribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System four seconds. braking is no longer desired. Once the brake (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), on or comes on while driving, it indicates that Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec- the brake system is not functioning properly WARNING! tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems and that immediate service is required. If the The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot work together to enhance both vehicle stabil- “Brake System Warning Light” does not prevent the natural laws of physics from ity and control in various driving conditions. come on when the ignition is turned to the acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer the traction afforded by prevailing road soon as possible. Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dynamic including those resulting from excessive

80 • Driver door must be closed. WARNING! WARNING! • The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. speed in turns, driving on very slippery complete attention is always required surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities • The gear selection must match vehicle up- while driving to maintain safe control of of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in ings can result in a collision or serious ner, which could jeopardize the user's REVERSE gear). personal injury. safety or the safety of others. • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate Disabling And Enabling HSA Hill Start Assist (HSA) if the transmission is in PARK or NEU- TRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual This feature can be turned on or turned off. To The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA change the current setting, proceed as follows: back from a complete stop while on an in- will remain active. • If disabling HSA using your instrument cline. If the driver releases the brake while cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to WARNING! Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru- hold the brake pressure for a short period. If ment Panel” for further information. the driver does not apply the throttle before There may be situations where the Hill this time expires, the system will release Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and • If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, slight rolling may occur, such as on minor brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while dia” for further information. the hill as normal. pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for For vehicles not equipped with an instrument The following conditions must be met in active driving involvement. It is always the cluster display, perform the following steps: order for HSA to activate: driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels • The feature must be enabled. objects, and most importantly brake op- pointing straight forward). eration to ensure safe operation of the • The vehicle must be stopped. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. vehicle under all road conditions. Your • Park brake must be off. 3. Apply the parking brake. 81 4. Start the engine. Towing With HSA Traction Control System (TCS) 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate This system monitors the amount of wheel than one-half turn to the left. roll back while towing a trailer. spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel

SAFETY 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake lower switch bank below the climate con- WARNING! pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or re- trol four times within 20 seconds. The duce engine power to provide enhanced ac- • If you use a trailer brake controller with celeration and stability. A feature of the TCS, “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on your trailer, the trailer brakes may be and turn off two times. Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions activated and deactivated with the brake similar to a limited slip differential and con- 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center switch. If so, there may not be enough trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If and then an additional slightly more than brake pressure to hold both the vehicle one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster one-half turn to the right. and the trailer on a hill when the brake than the other, the system will apply the pedal is released. In order to avoid roll- 8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow ing down an incline while resuming ac- more engine torque to be applied to the wheel then back to ON. If the sequence was celeration, manually activate the trailer completed properly, the “ESC Off Indica- that is not spinning. BLD may remain en- brake or apply more vehicle brake pres- abled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced tor Light” will blink several times to con- sure prior to releasing the brake pedal. mode. firm HSA is disabled. • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply 9. Repeat these steps if you want to return the parking brake fully when exiting your Electronic Stability Control (ESC) vehicle. Also, be certain to place the this feature to its previous setting. This system enhances directional control and transmission in PARK. stability of the vehicle under various driving • Failure to follow these warnings can re- conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or sult in a collision or serious personal understeering of the vehicle by applying the injury. brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. 82 ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and WARNING! WARNING! ing system, tire type and size or wheel compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can- size may adversely affect ESC perfor- When the actual path does not match the not prevent the natural laws of physics mance. Improperly inflated and un- intended path, ESC applies the brake of the from acting on the vehicle, nor can it evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting increase the traction afforded by prevail- performance. Any vehicle modification the oversteer or understeer condition. ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent or poor vehicle maintenance that re- accidents, including those resulting • Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning duces the effectiveness of the ESC sys- from excessive speed in turns, driving on more than appropriate for the steering tem can increase the risk of loss of very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. wheel position. vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per- ESC also cannot prevent accidents re- sonal injury and death. • Understeer — when the vehicle is turning sulting from loss of vehicle control due less than appropriate for the steering wheel to inappropriate driver input for the con- position. ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skill- ESC Operating Modes ful driver can prevent accidents. The The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle Light” located in the instrument cluster will NOTE: must never be exploited in a reckless or start to flash as soon as the ESC system Depending upon model and mode of opera- dangerous manner which could jeopar- becomes active. The “ESC Activation/ tion, the ESC system may have multiple op- dize the user’s safety or the safety of erating modes. Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes others. when the TCS is active. If the “ESC • Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop- ESC On Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be- erly maintain your vehicle, may change This is the normal operating mode for the gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the handling characteristics of your ve- ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the the accelerator and apply as little throttle as hicle, and may negatively affect the per- ESC system will be in this mode. This mode possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and formance of the ESC system. Changes to driving to the prevailing road conditions. the steering system, suspension, brak-

83 should be used for most driving conditions. “ESC OFF” message will display in the in- Alternate ESC modes should only be used for WARNING! strument cluster. To turn ESC ON again, specific reasons as noted in the following • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch. paragraphs. functionality of ESC, (except for the lim- SAFETY NOTE: ited slip feature described in the TCS Partial Off System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to section), has been disabled and the “Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi- predetermined speed. When the vehicle when a more spirited driving experience is nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the speed slows below the predetermined speed desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC engine power reduction feature of TCS is the system will return to ESC “Full Off”. thresholds for activation, which allows for disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta- more wheel spin than normally allowed. This bility offered by the ESC system is re- ESC modes may also be affected by drive mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes duced. modes if so equipped. stuck. • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial WARNING! To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily Off” mode. push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off • In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the Full Off — If Equipped torque reduction and stability features ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC are disabled. Therefore, enhanced ve- This mode is intended for off-highway or Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” hicle stability offered by the ESC system off-road use only and should not be used on will turn off. is unavailable. In an emergency evasive any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and maneuver, the ESC system will not en- NOTE: ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the gage to assist in maintaining stability. For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for a momentary button push will toggle the ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle off-highway or off-road use only. mode. Multiple momentary button pushed is stopped with the engine running. After five • With the ESC switched off, the en- may be required to return to ESC On. seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off hanced vehicle stability offered by ESC Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the is unavailable. In an emergency evasive

84 the engine running, a malfunction has been • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the WARNING! detected in the ESC system. If this light ESC system will be on even if it was turned maneuver, the ESC system will not en- remains on after several ignition cycles, and off previously. gage to assist in maintaining stability. the vehicle has been driven several miles • The ESC system will make buzzing or click- ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended for (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph ing sounds when it is active. This is normal; off-highway or off-road use. (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon • The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) the sounds will stop when ESC becomes as possible to have the problem diagnosed cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- inactive following the maneuver that and corrected. ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it caused the ESC activation. increase the traction afforded by prevail- The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indi- ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent Light” (located in the instrument cluster) cates the customer has elected to all accidents, including those resulting starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac- have the Electronic Stability Control from excessive speed in turns, driving on tion and the ESC system becomes active. The (ESC) in a reduced mode. very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ESC also cannot prevent collisions. Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator This system anticipates the potential for Light” begins to flash during acceleration, wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light ease up on the accelerator and apply as little wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. And ESC OFF Indicator Light throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your When ERM determines that the rate of speed and driving to the prevailing road con- change of the steering wheel angle and vehi- The “ESC Activation/Malfunction ditions. cle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause Indicator Light” in the instrument wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate cluster will come on when the NOTE: brake and may also reduce engine power to ignition is turned to the ON mode. • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. It should go out with the engine Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction come on momentarily each time the igni- occurring during severe or evasive driving Indicator Light” comes on continuously with tion is turned ON. 85 maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due Trailer Sway Control (TSC) to other factors, such as road conditions, WARNING! TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an leaving the roadway, or striking objects or location, and adjust the trailer load to other vehicles. excessively swaying trailer and will take the eliminate trailer sway.

SAFETY appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. NOTE: TSC will become active automatically once an ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full excessively swaying trailer is recognized. Ready Alert Braking (RAB) Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a NOTE: Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time complete explanation of the available ESC TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. required to reach full braking during emer- modes. Always use caution when towing a trailer and gency braking situations. It anticipates when follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda- an emergency braking situation may occur by WARNING! tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting monitoring how fast the throttle is released by And Operating” for further information. the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake Many factors, such as vehicle loading, system for a panic stop. road conditions and driving conditions, When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Rain Brake Support (RBS) influence the chance that wheel lift or Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent flash, the engine power may be reduced and Rain Brake Support may improve braking all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those you may feel the brakes being applied to performance in wet conditions. It will periodi- that involve leaving the roadway or striking individual wheels to attempt to stop the cally apply a small amount of brake pressure objects or other vehicles. The capabilities trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when to remove any water buildup on the front of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full brake rotors. It functions when the wind- be exploited in a reckless or dangerous Off” modes. shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When manner which could jeopardize the user's Rain Brake Support is active, there is no safety or the safety of others. WARNING! notification to the driver and no driver inter- action is required. If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe

86 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped Activating HDC Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the HDC is intended for low speed off road driving Once HDC is enabled it will activate auto- ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) mod- while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains matically if driven down a grade of sufficient ules that provides torque at the steering vehicle speed while descending hills during magnitude. The set speed for HDC is select- wheel for certain driving conditions in which various driving situations. HDC controls ve- able by the driver, and can be adjusted by the ESC module is detecting vehicle instabil- hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. using the gear shift +/-. The following sum- ity. The torque that the steering wheel re- marizes the HDC set speeds: ceives is only meant to help the driver realize HDC Has Three States: HDC Target Set Speeds optimal steering behavior in order to reach/ 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not maintain vehicle stability. The only notifica- activate). • P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but tion the driver receives that the feature is will not activate. 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but active is the torque applied to the steering activation conditions are not met, or driver • R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) wheel. is actively overriding with brake or throttle • N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) NOTE: application). • D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) The DST feature is only meant to help the 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively • 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) driver realize the correct course of action controlling vehicle speed). through small torques on the steering wheel, • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) which means the effectiveness of the DST Enabling HDC • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) feature is highly dependent on the driver’s HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied but the following conditions must also be met • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) torque. It is very important to realize that this to enable HDC: • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the • Driveline is in 4WD Low Range. • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) vehicle. • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) • Parking brake is released. • 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h) • Driver door is closed. • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped 87 NOTE: Disabling HDC • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for for several seconds then extinguish when HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any HDC target speed selection, but will not af- the driver pushes the HDC switch but en- of the following conditions occur: fect the gear chosen by the transmission. able conditions are not met. SAFETY When actively controlling HDC the transmis- • The driver pushes the HDC switch. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash sion will shift appropriately for the driver- • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low for several seconds then extinguish when selected set speed and corresponding driving Range. HDC disables due to excess speed. conditions. • The parking brake is applied. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash Driver Override • Driver door opens. when HDC deactivates due to overheated The driver may override HDC activation with brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will throttle or brake application at anytime. • The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph activate again once the brakes have cooled (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. sufficiently. Deactivating HDC • The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph HDC will be deactivated but remain available (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). WARNING! if any of the following conditions occur: • HDC detects excessive brake temperature. HDC is only intended to assist the driver in • Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle controlling vehicle speed when descend- Feedback To The Driver or brake application. ing hills. The driver must remain attentive • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and to the driving conditions and is respon- but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). the HDC switch has an LED icon, which sible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. • Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi- offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in. cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped an uphill grade. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu- • Vehicle is shifted to park. minate and remain on solid when HDC is SSC is intended for off road driving in 4WD enabled or activated. This is the normal Low Range only. SSC maintains vehicle operating condition for HDC. speed by actively controlling engine torque and brakes. 88 SSC has three states: • Transmission is in any selection other than P. NOTE: 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not • Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). • During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for activate). SSC target speed selection but will not The set speed for SSC is selectable by the 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but affect the gear chosen by the transmission. driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear activation conditions are not met, or driver While actively controlling SSC the trans- shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may is actively overriding with brake or throttle mission will shift appropriately for the be reduced when climbing a grade and the application). driver-selected set speed and correspond- level of set speed reduction depends on the ing driving conditions. 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively magnitude of grade. The following summa- • SSC performance is influenced by the Ter- controlling vehicle speed). rizes the SSC set speeds: rain Select mode. This difference may be Enabling SSC SSC Target Set Speeds notable to the driver and may be perceived as a varying level of aggressiveness. SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, • 1st = .6 mph (1 km/h) but the following conditions must also be met Driver Override: to enable SSC: • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) Driveline is in 4WD Low Range. • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) The driver may override SSC activation with • throttle or brake application at any time. • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) Deactivating SSC • Parking brake is released. • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) SSC will be deactivated but remain available • Driver door is closed. • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) if any of the following conditions occur: • Driver is not applying throttle. • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) • Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle Activating SSC • 8th = 5 mph (8 km/h) or brake application. Once SSC is enabled it will activate automati- • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) cally once the following conditions are met: • REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). • Driver releases throttle. • NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) • Vehicle is shifted to PARK. • Driver releases brake. • PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active 89 Disabling SSC • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash AUXILIARY DRIVING for several seconds then extinguish when SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the driver pushes the SSC switch but en- SYSTEMS the following conditions occur: able conditions are not met. Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If SAFETY • The driver pushes the SSC switch. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash Equipped • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low for several seconds then extinguish when Range. SSC disables due to excess speed. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside • The parking brake is applied. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway • Driver door opens. then extinguish when SSC deactivates due licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mo- to overheated brakes. • The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph torcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. WARNING! • The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately). SSC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when driving in Feedback To The Driver: off road conditions. The driver must re- The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and main attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe the SSC switch has an LED which offer feed- vehicle speed. back to the driver about the state SSC is in. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu- minate and remain on solid when SSC is enabled or activated. This is the normal Rear Detection Zones operating condition for SSC. When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both out- side rear view mirrors to let the driver know 90 that the system is operational. The BSM hicle, this may result in the BSM warning same side at the same time, both the visual system sensors operate when the vehicle is in light remaining illuminated the entire time and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to any forward gear or REVERSE and enters the vehicle is in a forward gear. the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK. • The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system The BSM detection zone covers approxi- may experience drop outs (blinking on and mately one lane width on both sides of the off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator vehicle 12 ft (3.7 m). The zone length starts lamps when a motorcycle or any small ob- at the outside mirror and extends approxi- ject remains at the side of the vehicle for mately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of extended periods of time (more than a the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the couple of seconds). detection zones on both sides of the vehicle The area on the rear fascia where the radar when the vehicle speed reaches approxi- sensors are located must remain free of snow, mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. BSM system can function properly. Do not BSM Warning Light block the area of the rear fascia where the NOTE: radar sensors are located with foreign objects The BSM system monitors the detection zone • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). from three different entry points (side, rear, about rapidly approaching vehicles that are front) while driving to see if an alert is neces- outside the detection zones. The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a sary. The BSM system will issue an alert • The BSM system detection zone does NOT during these types of zone entries. detected object. If the turn signal is then change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. activated, and it corresponds to an alert pres- Entering From The Side Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane ent on that side of the vehicle, an audible is clear for both your vehicle and trailer Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn before making a lane change. If the trailer from either side of the vehicle. signal and detected object are present on the or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equip- ment) extends beyond the side of your ve- 91 Entering From The Rear (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of WARNING! approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in Vehicles that come up from behind your ve- parking lot situations. hicle on either side and enter the rear detec- The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind

SAFETY tion zone with a relative speed of less than NOTE: spot zones. The BSM system is not de- 30 mph (48 km/h). In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles signed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or can be obscured by vehicles parked on either Overtaking Traffic animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped side. If the sensors are blocked by other with the BSM system, always check your If you pass another vehicle slowly with a structures or vehicles, the system will not be vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoul- able to alert the driver. relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) der, and use your turn signal before chang- and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for ing lanes. Failure to do so can result in When RCP is on and the vehicle is in RE- approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light serious injury or death. VERSE, the driver is alerted using both the will be illuminated. If the difference in speed visual and audible alarms, including reduc- between the two vehicles is greater than Rear Cross Path (RCP) ing the radio volume. 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in- illuminate. tended to aid the driver when backing out of WARNING! The BSM system is designed not to issue an parking spaces where their vision of oncom- Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, ing vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly back up aid system. It is intended to be posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, and cautiously out of the parking space until used to help a driver detect an oncoming occasionally the system may alert on such the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers objects. This is normal operation and your RCP system will then have a clear view of the must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully vehicle does not require service. cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. behind your vehicle, look behind you, and The BSM system will not alert you of objects be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, RCP monitors the rear detection zones on that are traveling in the opposite direction of other vehicles, obstructions, and blind both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are the vehicle in adjacent lanes. spots before backing up. Failure to do so moving toward the side of the vehicle with a can result in serious injury or death. minimum speed of approximately 3 mph 92 Modes Of Operation both the visual and audible alerts will be General Information issued. In addition to the audible alert the Three selectable modes of operation are The following regulatory statement applies to radio (if on) will also be muted. available in the Uconnect System. Refer to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the NOTE: this vehicle: Owner’s Manual for further information. Whenever an audible alert is requested by the This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC BSM system, the radio is also muted. Blind Spot Alert Lights Only Rules and with Industry Canada license- When the system is in RCP, the system shall exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the respond with both visual and audible alerts ject to the following two conditions: BSM system will provide a visual alert in the when a detected object is present. Whenever appropriate side view mirror based on a de- 1. This device may not cause harmful an audible alert is requested, the radio is also tected object. However, when the system is interference. operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime. 2. This device must accept any interference system will respond with both visual and received, including interference that may audible alerts when a detected object is pres- Blind Spot Alert Off cause undesired operation. ent. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted. When the BSM system is turned off there will NOTE: be no visual or audible alerts from either the Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime Changes or modifications not expressly ap- BSM or RCP systems. proved by the party responsible for compli- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/ NOTE: ance could void the user’s authority to oper- Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a The BSM system will store the current oper- ate the equipment. visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an time the vehicle is started the previously alert present on that side of the vehicle, an stored mode will be recalled and used. audible chime will also be sounded. When- ever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, 93 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With help slow the vehicle and mitigate the poten- • The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects Mitigation — If Equipped tial forward collision. If the driver reacts to other than vehicles such as guard rails or the warnings by braking and the system de- sign posts based on the course prediction. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Miti- termines that the driver intends to avoid the This is expected and is a part of normal SAFETY gation Operation collision by braking but has not applied suf- FCW activation and functionality. The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system ficient brake force, the system will compen- • It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after with mitigation provides the driver with au- sate and provide additional brake force as four Active Braking events within a key dible warnings, visual warnings (within the required. cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW instrument cluster display), and may apply a If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation will be deactivated until the next key cycle. brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a event begins at a speed below 32 mph • The FCW system is intended for on-road potential frontal collision. The warnings and (52 km/h), the system may provide the maxi- use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the limited braking are intended to provide the mum braking possible to mitigate the poten- driver with enough time to react, avoid or FCW system should be deactivated to pre- tial forward collision. If the Forward Collision vent unnecessary warnings to the mitigate the potential collision. Warning with Mitigation event stops the ve- surroundings. NOTE: hicle completely, the system will hold the FCW monitors the information from the for- vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then WARNING! ward looking sensors as well as the Electronic release the brakes. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the prob- When the system determines a collision with ability of a forward collision. When the sys- intended to avoid a collision on its own, the vehicle in front of you is no longer prob- tem determines that a forward collision is nor can FCW detect every type of potential able, the warning message will be deacti- probable, the driver will be provided with collision. The driver has the responsibility vated. audible and visual warnings and may provide to avoid a collision by controlling the ve- hicle via braking and steering. Failure to a brake jerk warning. NOTE: follow this warning could lead to serious If the driver does not take action based upon • The minimum speed for FCW activation is injury or death. these progressive warnings, then the system 1 mph (2 km/h). will provide a limited level of active braking to 94 FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity less reaction time than the “Far” and “Me- • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the dium” settings, which allows for a more dy- unavailable screens. The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking sta- namic driving experience. tus are programmable through the Uconnect FCW Limited Warning System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in NOTE: If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/ “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for fur- • Changing the FCW status to “Only Warn- FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW ther information. ing” prevents the system from providing Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Me- limited active braking, or additional brake shield” momentarily, there may be a condi- dium” setting and the system status is support if the driver is not braking ad- tion that limits FCW functionality. Although “Warning & Braking”. This allows the system equately in the event of a potential frontal the vehicle is still drivable under normal to warn the driver of a possible collision with collision, but maintains the audible and conditions, the active braking may not be the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn- visual warnings. fully available. Once the condition that lim- ings and it applies autonomous braking. • Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents ited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting the system from providing autonomous performance state. If the problem persists, allows the system to warn the driver of a braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event see an authorized dealer. possible collision with the vehicle in front of a potential frontal collision. using audible/visual warning when the latter Service FCW Warning is at a farther distance than "Medium" set- • The system will retain the last setting se- If the system turns off, and the instrument lected by the driver after ignition shut ting. This provides the most reaction time to cluster display reads: avoid a possible collision. down. • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required Changing the FCW status to the “Near” set- • FCW may not react to irrelevant objects • Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required ting, allows the system to warn the driver of a such as overhead objects, ground reflec- possible collision with the vehicle in front tions, objects not in the path of the vehicle, This indicates there is an internal system when the distance between the vehicle in the stationary objects that are far away, oncom- fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable front is much closer. This setting provides ing traffic, or leading vehicles with the under normal conditions, have the system same or higher rate of speed. checked by an authorized dealer. 95 General Information The tire pressure will vary with temperature pressure is at or above the recommended by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres- The following regulatory statement applies to (6.5°C). This means that when the outside sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in temperature decreases, the tire pressure will tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the

SAFETY this vehicle: decrease. Tire pressure should always be set tire pressure to the recommended cold plac- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is ard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Rules and with Industry Canada license- defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- has not been driven for at least three hours, or The system will automatically update and the ject to the following two conditions: driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure 1. This device may not cause harmful turn off once the system receives the updated must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- interference. tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be sure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 2. This device must accept any interference pressure will also increase as the vehicle is received, including interference that may driven. This is normal and there should be no (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive cause undesired operation. adjustment for this increased pressure. this information. NOTE: Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte- For example, your vehicle may have a recom- Changes or modifications not expressly ap- nance” for information on how to properly mended cold (parked for more than three proved by the party responsible for compli- inflate the vehicle’s tires. hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) ance could void the user’s authority to oper- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi ate the equipment. pressure if the tire pressure falls below the (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) low-pressure warning limit for any reason, Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will decrease the tire pressure to approxi- including low temperature effects and natu- mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ral pressure loss through the tire. low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure will warn the driver of a low tire pressure The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the ve- based on the vehicle recommended cold low tire pressure as long as the condition hicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to placard pressure. exists, and will not turn off until the tire approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire 96 Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure CAUTION! maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon- Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only Customers are encouraged to use OEM sibility to maintain correct tire pressure after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s wheels to assure TPMS feature operation. using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even recommended cold placard pressure value. • Using aftermarket tire sealants may if underinflation has not reached the level cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure NOTE: tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper- Monitoring Telltale Light.” When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may able. After using an aftermarket tire • Seasonal temperature changes will affect need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi sealant it is recommended that you take tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor (28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- your vehicle to an authorized dealer to the actual tire pressure in the tire. ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure have your sensor function checked. Monitoring Telltale Light off. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire Premium System pressure always reinstall the valve stem The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) CAUTION! cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt uses wireless technology with wheel rim from entering the valve stem, which mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire • The TPMS has been optimized for the could damage the TPMS sensor. pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each original equipment tires and wheels. wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire NOTE: TPMS pressures and warning have been pressure readings to the receiver module. established for the tire size equipped on • The TPMS is not intended to replace nor- NOTE: your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro- It is particularly important for you to check tion or sensor damage may result when vide warning of a tire failure or condition. using replacement equipment that is not the tire pressure in all of the tires on your of the same size, type, and/or style. The • Driving on a significantly underinflated tire vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper TPM sensor is not designed for use on causes the tire to overheat and can lead to pressure. aftermarket wheels, and may contribute tire failure. Underinflation also reduces to a poor overall system performance. fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 97 The TPMS consists of the following compo- the instrument cluster will return to their nents: original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitor- ing Telltale Light” will turn off. • Receiver module

SAFETY • Four tire pressure monitoring sensors NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may • Various tire pressure monitoring system need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi messages, which display in the instrument (28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- cluster ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure • Tire pressure monitoring telltale light Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn- 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to ings receive this information. Service TPMS Warning The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure When a system fault is detected, the “Tire the instrument cluster and a Warning Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on chime will sound when tire pres- Should this occur, you should stop as soon as solid. The system fault will also sound a sure is low in one or more of the possible and inflate the tires with low pres- chime. In addition, the instrument cluster four active road tires. In addition, the instru- sure (those in a different color in the instru- ment cluster will display a "Tire Low" mes- will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes- ment cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom- sage for a minimum of five seconds and then sage for a minimum of five seconds, an "In- mended cold placard pressure value as flate to XX" message and a graphic showing display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once value to indicate which sensor is not being the pressure values of each tire with the low the system receives the updated tire pres- received. tire pressure values in a different color. sures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the 98 “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will road tire that has a pressure below the 5. Once you repair or replace the original no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYS- low-pressure warning limit, upon the next road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in TEM” message will no longer display, and a ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale place of the compact spare or non- pressure value will display in place of the Light” will remain on and a chime will matching full size, the TPMS will update dashes. A system fault can occur due to any sound. In addition, the graphic in the automatically. In addition, the “TPMS of the following: instrument cluster will still display a dif- Telltale Light” will turn off and the • Jamming due to electronic devices or driv- ferent color pressure value and an "Inflate graphic in the instrument cluster will dis- ing next to facilities emitting the same to XX" message. play a new pressure value instead of radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min- dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is • Installing some form of aftermarket window utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS below the low-pressure warning limit in tinting that affects radio wave signals. Telltale Light” will flash on and off for any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to • Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In wheel housings. addition, the instrument cluster will dis- 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in play a “Service Tire Pressure System” order for the TPMS to receive this • Using tire chains on the vehicle. information. message for five seconds and then display • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. Tire Fill Alert sensors. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a This feature notifies the user when the plac- Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching chime will sound, the “TPMS Telltale ard tire pressure is attained while inflating or Full Size Spare Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds deflating the tire. 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching and then remain on solid, and the instru- The customer may choose to disable or en- full size does not have a tire pressure ment cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM able the Tire Fill Alert feature through use of monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS SYSTEM” message for five seconds and the customer settings in the radio. will not monitor the pressure in the com- then display dashes (- -) in place of the pact spare tire. pressure value. NOTE: 2. If you install the compact or non- • Only one tire can be filled at a time when matching full size spare tire in place of a using the Tire Fill Alert system. 99 • The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered • The horn will chirp once again when Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the if an existing TPM system fault is set to enough air is let out to reach proper infla- TPMS will no longer chime or display the “active” or if the system is in deactivation tion level. “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the mode (if equipped). instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain

SAFETY • The horn will also chirp three times if the in place of the pressure values. The system will be activated when there is tire is then under-inflated and will continue over 1.5 psi (10 kPa) of change in tire pres- to chirp every five seconds if the user con- To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four sure. The ignition must be in the RUN mode, tinues to deflate the tire. wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive with the transmission in PARK (P). TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above NOTE: The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the It is not required to have the engine running four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for to enter Tire Fill Alert mode. with wheel and tire assemblies that do not 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS- The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing TEM” message and then display pressure vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. values in place of the dashes. On the next When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" pressure display screen will be displayed in To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four message will no longer be displayed as long the instrument cluster. wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with as no system fault exists. tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Moni- Operation: toring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle • The horn will chirp to let the user know for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" recommended pressure. will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then • The horn will chirp three times if the tire is remain on. The instrument cluster will dis- over filled and will continue to chirp every play the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message five seconds if the user continues to inflate and then display dashes (--) in place of the the tire. pressure values. 100 General Information OCCUPANT RESTRAINT Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying The following regulatory statement applies to SYSTEMS air bag: all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: Some of the most important safety features in 1. Children 12 years old and under should your vehicle are the restraint systems: always ride buckled up in the rear seat of This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC a vehicle with a rear seat. Rules and with Industry Canada license- Occupant Restraint Systems Features 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- • Seat Belt Systems ject to the following two conditions: rear-facing child restraint) must ride in • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air the front passenger seat, move the seat as (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- Bags far back as possible and use the proper ference, and • Child Restraints child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” (2) This device must accept any interference in this section for further information). Some of the safety features described in this received, including interference that may section may be standard equipment on some 3. Children that are not big enough to wear cause undesired operation. models, or may be optional equipment on the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to NOTE: others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- “Child Restraints” in this section for fur- Changes or modifications not expressly ap- rized dealer. ther information) should be secured in the proved by the party responsible for compli- rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in Important Safety Precautions ance could void the user’s authority to oper- child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child ate the equipment. Please pay close attention to the information restraints or belt-positioning booster seats in this section. It tells you how to use your should ride properly buckled up in the rear restraint system properly, to keep you and seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. your passengers as safe as possible.

101 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System WARNING! belt behind them or under their arm. (BeltAlert) 5. You should read the instructions provided • Never place a rear-facing child restraint Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

SAFETY with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. senger front air bag can cause death or BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind serious injury to a child 12 years or the driver and outboard front seat passenger 6. All occupants should always wear their lap younger, including a child in a rear- (if equipped with outboard front passenger and shoulder belts properly. facing child restraint. seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The 7. The driver and front passenger seats • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni- should be moved back as far as practical the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi- to allow the front air bags room to inflate. tion. Seat Belt Systems 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If Initial Indication your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy- Buckle up even though you are an excellent If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate driver, even on short trips. Someone on the switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi- forcefully into the space between occu- road may be a poor driver and could cause a tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If pants and the door and occupants could collision that includes you. This can happen the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if be injured. far away from home or on your own street. equipped with outboard front passenger seat 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs Research has shown that seat belts save BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition to be modified to accommodate a dis- lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi- abled person, refer to the “Customer As- injuries in a collision. Some of the worst tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on sistance” section for customer service injuries happen when people are thrown from and remain on until both outboard front seat contact information. the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility belts are buckled. The outboard front passen- of ejection and the risk of injury caused by ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out- striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in board front passenger seat is unoccupied. a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

102 BeltAlert Warning Sequence the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning Lap/Shoulder Belts sequence will begin until the seat belts are The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated All seating positions in your vehicle are buckled again. when the vehicle is moving above a specified equipped with lap/shoulder belts. vehicle speed range and the driver or out- The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if is not active when the outboard front passen- during very sudden stops or collisions. This equipped with outboard front passenger seat ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be feature allows the shoulder part of the seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat triggered when an animal or other items are belt to move freely with you under normal BeltAlert is not active when the outboard placed on the outboard front passenger seat conditions. However, in a collision the seat front passenger seat is unoccupied). The or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, of the vehicle. an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert and cargo is properly stowed. warning sequence has completed, the Seat WARNING! Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not • Relying on the air bags alone could lead sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed recommend deactivating BeltAlert. to more severe injuries in a collision. The until the driver and occupied outboard front NOTE: air bags work with your seat belt to seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the restrain you properly. In some collisions, driver should instruct all occupants to buckle driver or outboard front seat passenger (if the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always their seat belts. equipped with outboard front passenger seat wear your seat belt even though you have BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re- air bags. Change of Status • In a collision, you and your passengers minder Light will turn on and remain on until can suffer much greater injuries if you If the driver or outboard front seat passenger the driver and outboard front seat passenger are not properly buckled up. You can (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat belts are buckled. strike the interior of your vehicle or other seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while passengers, or you can be thrown out of

103 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! the vehicle. Always be sure you and your seat belt safely and to keep your • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong others in your vehicle are buckled up passengers safe, too. buckle will not protect you properly. The

SAFETY properly. • Two people should never be belted into a lap portion could ride too high on your • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, single seat belt. People belted together body, possibly causing internal injuries. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- can crash into one another in a collision, Always buckle your seat belt into the sion, people riding in these areas are hurting one another badly. Never use a buckle nearest you. more likely to be seriously injured or lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more • A seat belt that is too loose will not killed. than one person, no matter what their protect you properly. In a sudden stop, • Do not allow people to ride in any area of size. you could move too far forward, increas- your vehicle that is not equipped with ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seats and seat belts. WARNING! seat belt snugly. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc- • A lap belt worn too high can increase the dangerous. Your body could strike the cupants, including the driver, should al- risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli- ways wear their seat belts whether or not forces won’t be at the strong hip and sion, increasing head and neck injury. A an air bag is also provided at their seat- pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. seat belt worn under the arm can cause ing position to minimize the risk of se- Always wear the lap part of your seat belt internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as vere injury or death in the event of a as low as possible and keep it snug. shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over crash. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you your shoulder so that your strongest • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could properly. In a collision, it could even cut bones will take the force in a collision. make your injuries in a collision much into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat • A shoulder belt placed behind you will worse. You might suffer internal injuries, against your body, without twists. If you not protect you from injury during a or you could even slide out of the seat can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve- collision. You are more likely to hit your belt. Follow these instructions to wear hicle, take it to your authorized dealer head in a collision if you do not wear immediately and have it fixed.

104 WARNING! your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re- placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit 1 — Seat Belt Buckle 1 — Insert the latch plate into the back and adjust the seat. 2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate buckle until you hear a “click.” 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull insert the latch plate into the buckle until lies low across your hips, below your ab- out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up you hear a “click.” domen. To remove slack in the lap belt the webbing as far as necessary to allow portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To the seat belt to go around your lap. loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 105 5. Position the shoulder belt across the 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it As a guide, if you are shorter than average, shoulder and chest with minimal, if any clears the folded webbing and the seat you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in slack so that it is comfortable and not belt is no longer twisted. a lower position, and if you are taller than resting on your neck. The retractor will average, you will prefer the shoulder belt SAFETY Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. anchorage in a higher position. After you 6. To release the seat belt, push the red In the driver and outboard front passenger release the anchorage button, try to move it button on the buckle. The seat belt will seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be up or down to make sure that it is locked in automatically retract to its stowed posi- adjusted upward or downward to position the position. seat belt away from your neck. Push or tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate NOTE: squeeze the anchorage button to release the down the webbing to allow the seat belt to The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor- anchorage, and move it up or down to the retract fully. age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This position that serves you best. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without Use the following procedure to untwist a pushing or squeezing the release button. To twisted lap/shoulder belt. verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, 1. Position the latch plate as close as pos- pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor- sible to the anchor point. age until it is locked into position. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) WARNING! above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could fold that begins immediately above the make your injuries in a collision much latch plate. worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the belt. Follow these instructions to wear folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. Adjustable Anchorage 106 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular WARNING! latch plate from its stowed position in the your seat belt safely and to keep your left rear side trim panel. passengers safe, too. • Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. • Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating In- structions — Fixed Rear Seat — If Equipped Shoulder Belt Routed Through The Seat The second row center seat belt may feature a Belt Guide Loop seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, 3. Route the shoulder belt through the seat which allows the seat belt to detach from the Mini-Latch Stowage lower anchor when the seat is folded. The belt guide loop on the top of the seat back mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the near the inboard side of the left head then be stored out of the way in the left side seat belt over the seat. restraint. trim panel for added convenience to open up 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, utilization of the storage areas behind the insert the mini-latch plate into the mini- front seats when the seat is not occupied. buckle until you hear a “click.”

107 loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the the mini-buckle for storage, insert the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a regular latch plate into the center red collision. slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt SAFETY 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so will automatically retract to its stowed that it is comfortable and not resting on position. If necessary, slide the latch your neck. The retractor will withdraw any plate down the webbing to allow the seat slack in the seat belt. belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

Mini-Latch Plate Buckled

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. 6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your ab- 9. To release the seat belt, push the red Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle domen. To remove slack in the lap belt button on the buckle. portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To 108 (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your Seat Belts And Pregnant Women WARNING! authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat • If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should are not properly connected when the be used only if the existing seat belt is not seat belt is used by an occupant, the long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is seat belt will not be able to provide not required for a different occupant, it must proper restraint and will increase the risk be removed. of injury in a collision. • When reattaching the mini-latch plate WARNING! and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is twisted, follow the preceding procedure physically required in order to properly to detach the mini-latch plate and mini- fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT buckle, untwist the webbing, and reat- USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when Pregnant Women And Seat Belts worn, the distance between the front tach the mini-latch plate and mini- Seat belts must be worn by all occupants edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle buckle. including pregnant women: the risk of injury and the center of the occupant’s body is • When the center seat belt is in use, in the event of an accident is reduced for the LESS than 6 inches. make sure that any cargo in the cargo mother and the unborn child if they are wear- • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not compartment is properly secured and ing a seat belt. does not contact the seat belt webbing, needed can increase the risk of serious and that there is no slack in the center injury or death in a collision. Only use Position the lap belt snug and low below the shoulder belt webbing. the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt abdomen and across the strong bones of the is not long enough and only use in the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest Seat Belt Extender recommended seating positions. Re- and away from the neck. Never place the move and store the Seat Belt Extender shoulder belt behind the back or under the If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, when not needed. arm. even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage 109 Seat Belt Pretensioner in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to The front outboard seat belt system is release webbing in a controlled manner. equipped with pretensioning devices that are

SAFETY designed to remove slack from the seat belt Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor in the event of a collision. These devices may (ALR) improve the performance of the seat belt by The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- removing slack from the seat belt early in a tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto- collision. Pretensioners work for all size oc- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used cupants, including those in child restraints. to secure a child restraint system. For addi- NOTE: tional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un- These devices are not a substitute for proper der the “Child Restraints” section of this seat belt placement by the occupant. The manual. The figure below illustrates the lock- seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi- ing feature for each seating position. ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking tioned properly. Retractor (Fixed Seat) The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu- If the passenger seating position is equipped pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air with an ALR and is being used for normal bags, the pretensioners are single use items. usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag enough to comfortably wrap around the occu- must be replaced immediately. pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the Energy Management Feature ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow The front outboard seat belt system is the webbing to retract completely in this case equipped with an Energy Management feature and then carefully pull out only the amount of that may help further reduce the risk of injury ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (Sliding Seat) 110 webbing necessary to comfortably wrap How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the WARNING! 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder latch plate into the buckle until you hear a • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly belt. "click." could increase the risk of injury in colli- 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down- sions. In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder ward until the entire seat belt is extracted. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat to restrain occupants who are wearing 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the the seat belt or children who are using belt retracts, you will hear a clicking shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking booster seats. The locked mode is only Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in sound. This indicates the seat belt is now used to install rear-facing or forward- a seating position that has a seat belt with in the Automatic Locking Mode. facing child restraints that have a har- this feature. Children 12 years old and under How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode ness for restraining the child. should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) and allow it to retract completely to disen- WARNING! gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti- Some of the safety features described in this vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock- section may be standard equipment on some • Never place a rear-facing child restraint ing mode. models, or may be optional equipment on in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- others. If you are not sure, ask your autho- senger front air bag can cause death or rized dealer. serious injury to a child 12 years or WARNING! The air bag system must be ready to protect younger, including a child in a rear- • The seat belt assembly must be replaced you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint facing child restraint. if the switchable Automatic Locking Re- • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir- the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. belt function is not working properly cuits and interconnecting wiring associated when checked according to the proce- with the electrical Air Bag System Compo- dures in the Service Manual. nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components: 111 Air Bag System Components The ORC contains a backup power supply • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come system that may deploy the air bag system on during the four to eight seconds when • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) even if the battery loses power or it becomes the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN • Air Bag Warning Light disconnected prior to deployment. position. SAFETY • Steering Wheel and Column The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after • Instrument Panel in the instrument panel for approximately the four to eight-second interval. • Knee Impact Bolsters four to eight seconds for a self-check when • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter- the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN mittently or remains on while driving. • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags position. After the self-check, the Air Bag NOTE: • Seat Belt Buckle Switch Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en- • Supplemental Side Air Bags a malfunction in any part of the system, it gine related gauges are not working, the Oc- turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either • Supplemental Knee Air Bags cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also momentarily or continuously. A single chime • Front and Side Impact Sensors be disabled. In this condition the air bags will sound to alert you if the light comes on may not be ready to inflate for your protec- • Seat Belt Pretensioners again after initial startup. tion. Have an authorized dealer service the • Seat Track Position Sensors The ORC also includes diagnostics that will air bag system immediately. • Occupant Classification System illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected WARNING! Air Bag Warning Light that could affect the air bag system. The Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your The ORC monitors the readiness of the diagnostics also record the nature of the instrument panel could mean you won’t electronic parts of the air bag system when- malfunction. While the air bag system is have the air bag system to protect you in a ever the ignition switch is in the START or designed to be maintenance free, if any of collision. If the light does not come on as a ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the following occurs, have an authorized bulb check when the ignition is first the OFF position or in the ACC position, the dealer service the air bag system immedi- turned on, stays on after you start the air bag system is not on and the air bags will ately. vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have not inflate. 112 Front Air Bags WARNING! an authorized dealer service the air bag This vehicle has front air bags and lap/ system immediately. shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supple- Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is bag is mounted in the instrument panel, detected, which could affect the Supplemen- tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant above the glove compartment. The words Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag on the air bag covers. Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Warning Light has come on and a fault has Locations been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag 1 — Driver Front Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or 2 — Passenger Front Air Bag remains on while driving have an authorized 3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air dealer service the vehicle immediately. Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster For additional information regarding the Re- 4 — Supplemental Passenger Knee Air dundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Get- Bag/Passenger Knee Impact Bolster ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual.

113 The first stage inflator is triggered immedi- WARNING! ately during an impact that requires air bag WARNING! • Being too close to the steering wheel or deployment. A low energy output is used in • No objects should be placed over or near instrument panel during front air bag less severe collisions. A higher energy output the air bag on the instrument panel or SAFETY deployment could cause serious injury, is used for more severe collisions. steering wheel because any such objects including death. Air bags need room to This vehicle may be equipped with a driver could cause harm if the vehicle is in a inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending collision severe enough to cause the air and/or front passenger seat belt buckle your arms to reach the steering wheel or bag to inflate. switch that detects whether the driver or front instrument panel. • Do not put anything on or around the air passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt • Never place a rear-facing child restraint bag covers or attempt to open them in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of manually. You may damage the air bags senger front air bag can cause death or the Advanced Front Air Bags. and you could be injured because the air serious injury to a child 12 years or This vehicle may be equipped with driver bags may no longer be functional. The younger, including a child in a rear- and/or front passenger seat track position protective covers for the air bag cush- facing child restraint. sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of ions are designed to open only when the • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat air bags are inflating. the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead position. to more severe injuries in a collision. The Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features This vehicle is equipped with a right front air bags work with your seat belt to passenger Occupant Classification System restrain you properly. In some collisions, The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul- (“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passen- air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear tistage driver and front passenger air bags. ger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropri- your seat belts even though you have air This system provides output appropriate to ate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as bags. the severity and type of collision as deter- determined by the OCS. mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. 114 Front Air Bag Operation A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And to inflate the front air bags. Sensor Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- tional protection by supplementing the seat The steering wheel hub trim cover and the The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) belts. Front air bags are not expected to upper passenger side of the instrument panel is located underneath the front passenger reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or separate and fold out of the way as the air seat. The Sensor is located beneath the pas- rollover collisions. The front air bags will not bags inflate to their full size. The front air senger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the deploy in all frontal collisions, including bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM some that may produce substantial vehicle blink your eyes. The front air bags then uses input from the Sensor to determine the damage — for example, some pole collisions, quickly deflate while helping to restrain the front passenger’s most probable classifica- truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. driver and front passenger. tion. The OCM communicates this informa- tion to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the On the other hand, depending on the type Occupant Classification System (OCS) — inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced and location of impact, front air bags may Front Passenger Seat Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end classification. In order for the OCS to operate The OCS is part of a Federally regulated damage but that produce a severe initial as designed, it is important for the front safety system for this vehicle. It is designed deceleration. passenger to be seated properly and properly to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag wearing the seat belt. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decel- output appropriate to the occupant’s seated eration over time, vehicle speed and damage by weight, as determined by the OCS. The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the themselves are not good indicators of whether or Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS The Occupant Classification System (OCS) not an air bag should have deployed. may reduce the inflation rate of the Passen- consists of the following: ger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS esti- Seat belts are necessary for your protection in • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) mates that: all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. • Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and • The front passenger seat is unoccupied or Sensor located in the front passenger seat has very light objects on it; or When the ORC detects a collision requiring • Air Bag Warning Light • The front passenger seat is occupied by a the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. small passenger, including a child; or 115 • The front passenger seat is occupied by a In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it rear-facing child restraint; or WARNING! is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat • The front passenger is not properly seated • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- belt. Properly seated passengers are:

SAFETY or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time. senger front air bag can cause death or • Sitting upright serious injury to a child 12 years or Front Passenger Seat Front Passenger Air • Facing forward younger, including a child in a rear- Occupant Status Bag Output facing child restraint. • Sitting in the center of the seat with their Rear-facing child re- Reduced-power de- • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in feet comfortably on or near the floor straint ployment the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. Child, including a Reduced-power de- • Sitting with their back against the seatback child in a forward- ployment OR Full- • Children 12 years or younger should and the seatback in an upright position facing child restraint power deployment always ride buckled up in the rear seat of or booster seat* a vehicle with a rear seat. Properly seated adult Full-power deploy- ment OR reduced- The OCS determines the front passenger’s power deployment most probable classification. The OCS esti- Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de- mates the seated weight on the front passen- ployment ger seat and where that weight is located. The OCS communicates the classification status * It is possible for a child to be classified as to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger to determine whether the Passenger Ad- Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never vanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be allow children to ride in the front passenger adjusted. Seated Properly seat and never install a child restraint sys- tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.

116 Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small passenger’s seated weight on the front pas- • Anything that may decrease or increase the Adults) senger seat may result in a full-power deploy- front passenger’s seated weight. ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air When a lighter weight passenger, including a The OCS determines the front passenger’s Bag. small adult, occupies the front passenger most probable classification. If an occupant seat, the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of Examples of improper front passenger seat- in the front passenger seat is seated improp- the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This ing include: erly, the occupant may provide an output does not mean that the OCS is working im- • The front passenger’s weight is transferred signal to the OCS that is different from the properly. to another part of the vehicle (like the door, occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example: Do not decrease OR increase the front passen- arm rest or instrument panel). ger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat • The front passenger leans forward, side- The front passenger’s seated weight must be ways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle. properly positioned on the front passenger • The front passenger’s seatback is not in the seat. Failure to do so may result in serious full upright position. injury or death. The OCS determines the most • The front passenger carries or holds an probable classification of the occupant that it object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, detects. The OCS will detect the front pas- etc.). senger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted in- • Objects are lodged under the front passen- ger seat. flation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Not Seated Properly Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that • Objects are lodged between the front pas- the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing senger seat and center console. the front passenger’s seated weight on the • Accessories that may change the seated front passenger seat may result in a reduced- weight on the front passenger seat are at- power deployment of the Passenger Ad- tached to the front passenger seat. vanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front 117 WARNING! the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor.

SAFETY • Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occu- pant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly death in a collision. • Placing an object on the floor under the WARNING! front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may • If a child restraint system, child, small result in serious injury or death in a teenager or adult in the front passenger collision. Do not place any objects on seat is seated improperly, the occupant the floor under the front passenger seat. may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s The Air Bag Warning Light in the instru- properly seated weight input. This may ment panel will turn on whenever the OCS is result in serious injury or death in a unable to classify the front passenger seat collision. status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect Not Seated Properly • Always wear your seat belt and sit prop- the operation of the air bag system. If the Air erly, with the seatback in an upright Bag Warning Light does not come on, or position, your back against the seat- stays on after you start the vehicle, or it back, sitting upright, facing forward, in comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately. 118 The passenger seat assembly contains criti- • Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. Knee Impact Bolsters cal OCS components that may affect the • At no time should any Supplemental Re- The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. straint System (SRS) component or SRS In order for the OCS to properly classify the knees of the driver and front passenger, and related component or fastener be modified position the front occupants for improved seated weight of a front seat passenger, the or replaced with any part except those interaction with the front air bags. OCS components must function as designed. which are approved by FCA US LLC. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to WARNING! WARNING! the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee cushion needs service for any reason, take • Unapproved modifications or service pro- impact bolsters in any way. the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only cedures to the passenger seat assembly, • Do not mount any accessories to the FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may its related components, seat cover or knee impact bolsters such as alarm be used. cushion may inadvertently change the air lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. The following requirements must be strictly bag deployment in case of a frontal colli- followed: sion. This could result in death or serious Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger injury to the front passenger if the vehicle Knee Air Bags • Do not modify the front passenger seat is involved in a collision. A modified ve- assembly or components in any way. hicle may not comply with required Fed- This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental • Do not use prior or future model year seat eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FM- Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instru- covers or cushions not designated by FCA VSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle ment panel below the steering column and a US LLC for the specific model being re- Safety Standards (CMVSS). Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag paired. Always use the correct seat cover • If it is necessary to modify the air bag mounted in the instrument panel below the and cushion specified for the vehicle. system for persons with disabilities, con- glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion tact your authorized dealer. Air Bags provide enhanced protection during with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion. a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.

119 Supplemental Side Air Bags WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air SAFETY This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Bags; the performance could be adversely Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains front seats. The SABs are marked with a (SABICs) “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur- in addition to the injury reduction potential Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side tains (SABICs) are located above the side provided by the seat belts and body structure. Air Bag Label windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occu- pant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. 120 are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs WARNING! inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the injury from a deploying air bag. roof of the vehicle for any reason. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of Side Impacts partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu- The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in pants through side windows in certain side certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint impact events. Controller (ORC) determines whether the de- ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular WARNING! impact event is appropriate, based on the • Do not mount equipment, or stack lug- severity and type of collision. The side impact gage or other cargo up high enough to sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap- block the deployment of the SABICs. propriate response to impact events. The sys- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable The trim covering above the side win- tem is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags Curtain (SABIC) Label Location dows where the SABIC and its deploy- on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and ment path are located should remain protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags other injuries to front and rear seat outboard free from any obstructions. deploy independently; a left side impact de- occupants in certain side impacts, in addi- • In order for the SABICs to work as in- ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right- tion to the injury reduction potential provided tended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags by the seat belts and body structure. the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sun- only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good The SABIC deploys downward, covering the roof to your vehicle. Do not add roof indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the racks that require permanent attach- should have deployed. outside edge of the headliner out of the way ments (bolts or screws) for installation The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side and covers the window. The SABICs inflate collisions, including some collisions at cer- with enough force to injure occupants if they tain angles, or some side collisions that do 121 not impact the area of the passenger com- Rollover Events partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy WARNING! Side Air Bags are designed to activate in during angled or offset frontal collisions the seats. Children must be properly certain rollover events. The ORC determines where the front air bags deploy. restrained in a child restraint or booster SAFETY seat that is appropriate for the size of the whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat child. in a particular rollover event is appropriate, belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in based on the severity and type of collision. less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indi- WARNING! cator of whether or not Side Air Bags should WARNING! • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do have deployed. not lean against the door or window. Sit • Occupants, including children, who are The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all upright in the center of the seat. up against or very close to Side Air Bags rollover events. The rollover sensing system • Being too close to the Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occu- determines if a rollover event may be in during deployment could cause you to pants, including children, should never progress and whether deployment is appro- be severely injured or killed. priate. In the event the vehicle experiences a lean on or sleep against the door, side • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could rollover or near rollover event, and deploy- windows, or area where the side air bags lead to more severe injuries in a colli- inflate, even if they are in an infant or sion. The Side Air Bags work with your ment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the child restraint. seat belt to restrain you properly. In rollover sensing system will also deploy the • Seat belts (and child restraints where some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the appropriate) are necessary for your pro- deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt vehicle. tection in all collisions. They also help even though you have Side Air Bags. keep you in position, away from an in- The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu- flating Side Air Bag. To get the best NOTE: pants through side windows in certain roll- protection from the Side Air Bags, occu- Air bag covers may not be obvious in the pants must wear their seat belts properly over or side impact events. interior trim, but they will open during air bag and sit upright with their backs against deployment.

122 Air Bag System Components If A Deployment Occurs have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, NOTE: The front air bags are designed to deflate move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) immediately after deployment. see your doctor. If these particles settle on monitors the internal circuits and intercon- NOTE: your clothing, follow the garment manufac- necting wiring associated with electrical Air Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all turer’s instructions for cleaning. Bag System Components listed below: collisions. This does not mean something is Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) wrong with the air bag system. have deployed. If you are involved in another • Air Bag Warning Light If you do have a collision which deploys the collision, the air bags will not be in place to • Steering Wheel and Column air bags, any or all of the following may occur: protect you. • Instrument Panel • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc- • Knee Impact Bolsters WARNING! cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags The abrasions are similar to friction rope Deployed air bags and seat belt preten- sioners cannot protect you in another col- • Seat Belt Buckle Switch burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten- • Supplemental Side Air Bags caused by contact with chemicals. They are sioners, and the seat belt retractor • Supplemental Knee Air Bags not permanent and normally heal quickly. assemblies replaced by an authorized However, if you haven’t healed significantly dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu- • Front and Side Impact Sensors within a few days, or if you have any blis- pant Restraint Controller System serviced • Seat Belt Pretensioners tering, see your doctor immediately. as well. • Seat Track Position Sensors • As the air bags deflate, you may see some NOTE: • Occupant Classification System smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that gen- • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag interior trim, but they will open during air inflation. These airborne particles may irri- bag deployment. tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you 123 • After any collision, the vehicle should be • Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the Enhanced Accident Response System Reset taken to an authorized dealer immediately. HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circu- Procedure lation Door Enhanced Accident Response System In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re- • Cut off battery power to the: SAFETY sponse System functions after an event, the In the event of an impact, if the communica- – Engine ignition switch must be changed from igni- tion network remains intact, and the power – Electric Motor (if equipped) tion START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Care- remains intact, depending on the nature of – Electric power steering fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the the event, the ORC will determine whether to – Brake booster engine compartment and on the ground near have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- – Electric park brake the engine compartment and fuel tank before tem perform the following functions: – Automatic transmission gear selector resetting the system and starting the engine. – Horn • Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped) Maintaining Your Air Bag System – Front wiper • Cut off battery power to the electric motor – Headlamp washer pump (If Equipped) WARNING! NOTE: • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery • Modifications to any part of the air bag After an accident, remember to cycle the has power system could cause it to fail when you ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on need it. You could be injured if the air as long as the battery has power or for 15 and remove the key from the ignition switch bag system is not there to protect you. minutes from the intervention of the En- to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check Do not modify the components or wiring, hanced Accident Response System. the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com- including adding any kind of badges or partment and on the ground near the engine stickers to the steering wheel hub trim • Unlock the power door locks. compartment and fuel tank before resetting cover or the upper right side of the Your vehicle may also be designed to perform the system and starting the engine. If there instrument panel. Do not modify the any of these other functions in response to are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle front bumper, vehicle body structure, or electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an the Enhanced Accident Response System: add aftermarket side steps or running accident, reset the system by following the boards. procedure described below. 124 hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in enforcement, could combine the EDR data WARNING! understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- with the type of personally identifying data • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of formed. The EDR is designed to record data routinely acquired during a crash investiga- the air bag system yourself. Be sure to related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- tion. tell anyone who works on your vehicle tems for a short period of time, typically To read data recorded by an EDR, special that it has an air bag system. 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is • Do not attempt to modify any part of your equipment is required, and access to the designed to record such data as: air bag system. The air bag may inflate vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to accidentally or may not function prop- • How various systems in your vehicle were the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such erly if modifications are made. Take your operating; as law enforcement, that have the special vehicle to an authorized dealer for any • Whether or not the driver and passenger equipment, can read the information if they air bag system service. If your seat, in- safety belts were buckled/fastened; have access to the vehicle or the EDR. cluding your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ- • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing Child Restraints the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ing removal or loosening/tightening of Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle • How fast the vehicle was traveling. up at all times, including babies and chil- to your authorized dealer. Only manufac- dren. Every state in the United States, and turer approved seat accessories may be These data can help provide a better under- every Canadian province, requires that small used. If it is necessary to modify the air standing of the circumstances in which children ride in proper restraint systems. This bag system for persons with disabilities, crashes and injuries occur. is the law, and you can be prosecuted for contact your authorized dealer. NOTE: ignoring it. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if Event Data Recorder (EDR) a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data Children 12 years or younger should ride This vehicle is equipped with an event data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail- recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, able. According to crash statistics, children is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like gender, age, and crash location) are re- are safer when properly restrained in the rear situations, such as an air bag deployment or corded. However, other parties, such as law seats rather than in the front. 125 There are different sizes and types of re- also make sure that you can install it in the WARNING! straints for children from newborn size to the vehicle where you will use it. child almost large enough for an adult safety In a collision, an unrestrained child can NOTE: become a projectile inside the vehicle. belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s SAFETY The force required to hold even an infant Manual to make sure you have the correct • For additional information, refer to on your lap could become so great that you seat for your child. Carefully read and follow www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or could not hold the child, no matter how all the instructions and warnings in the child call: 1–888–327–4236 strong you are. The child and others could restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la- • Canadian residents should refer to Transport be badly injured or killed. Any child riding bels attached to the child restraint. Canada’s website for additional information: in your vehicle should be in a proper re- Before buying any restraint system, make http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ straint for the child’s size. sure that it has a label certifying that it meets safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm all applicable Safety Standards. You should Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight lim- Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of its of their child restraint the vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five- Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat their rear-facing child restraint of the vehicle Children who have outgrown their forward- Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children facing child restraint, but are too small to prop- seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat

126 Infant And Child Restraints All children whose weight or height is above WARNING! the forward-facing limit for the child seat Safety experts recommend that children ride should use a belt-positioning booster seat rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two • Never place a rear-facing child restraint until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If years old or until they reach either the height in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- senger front air bag can cause death or the child cannot sit with knees bent over the or weight limit of their rear-facing child re- serious injury to a child 12 years or vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back straint. Two types of child restraints can be younger, including a child in a rear- is against the seatback, they should use a used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert- facing child restraint. belt-positioning booster seat. The child and ible child seats. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in belt-positioning booster seat are held in the The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. vehicle by the seat belt. the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or Older Children And Child Restraints WARNING! height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible Children who are two years old or who have • Improper installation can lead to failure child seats can be used either rear-facing or outgrown their rear-facing convertible child of an infant or child restraint. It could forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. come loose in a collision. The child child seats often have a higher weight limit in Forward-facing child seats and convertible the rear-facing direction than infant carriers could be badly injured or killed. Follow child seats used in the forward-facing direc- the child restraint manufacturer’s direc- do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil- tion are for children who are over two years tions exactly when installing an infant or dren who have outgrown their infant carrier old or who have outgrown the rear-facing child restraint. but are still less than at least two years old. weight or height limit of their rear-facing • After a child restraint is installed in the Children should remain rear-facing until they convertible child seat. Children should re- vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat reach the highest weight or height allowed by main in a forward-facing child seat with a forward or rearward because it can their convertible child seat. harness for as long as possible, up to the loosen the child restraint attachments. highest weight or height allowed by the child Remove the child restraint before ad- seat. justing the vehicle seat position. When

127 1. Can the child sit all the way back against buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or WARNING! the back of the vehicle seat? slouching can move the belt out of position. the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, install the child restraint. move the child closer to the center of the SAFETY • When your child restraint is not in use, over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back? vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt seat belt on the child correctly. or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the shoulder between the neck and arm? vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it WARNING! 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as could strike the occupants or seatbacks Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt possible, touching the child’s thighs and and cause serious personal injury. under an arm or behind their back. In a not the stomach? crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the child properly, which may result in serious Children who are large enough to wear the whole trip? injury or death. A child must always wear shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are both the lap and shoulder portions of the If the answer to any of these questions was seat belt correctly. long enough to bend over the front of the seat “no,” then the child still needs to use a when their back is against the seatback, booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt this simple 5-step test to decide whether the fit periodically and make sure the seat belt child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

128 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below + Child Restraint LATCH – Lower An- Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower An- Seat Belt + Top chors Only chors + Top Tether Tether Anchor Anchor Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X Forward-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child re- ing position. These anchorages are used to (LATCH) Restraint System straint anchorage system called LATCH, install LATCH-equipped child seats without which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating for CHildren. The LATCH system has three positions may have a top tether anchorage vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- but no lower anchorages. In these seating equipped child seats. There are two lower positions, the seat belt must be used with the anchorages located at the back of the seat top tether anchorage to install the child re- cushion where it meets the seatback and one straint. Please see the following table for top tether anchorage located behind the seat- more information.

LATCH Label 129 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Re- straints In This Vehicle SAFETY

Fixed Second Row LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 An- chorages Per Seating Position) Sliding Second Row LATCH Positions Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 An- chorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the What is the weight limit (child’s weight + combined weight of the child and the child weight of the child restraint) for using the restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt 65 lbs (29.5 kg) LATCH anchorage system to attach the child and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system restraint? once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

130 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear- Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt facing or forward-facing child restraint. be used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Fixed 2nd Row Seating: You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the Can a child seat be installed in the center posi- center position. The inner anchorages are Yes – Fixed 2nd Row Only tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages? 18 inches (460 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position Can two child restraints be attached using a does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor- No common lower LATCH anchorage? ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the passenger seat if the child restraint manufac- Yes back of the front passenger seat? turer also allows contact. See your child re- straint owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All rear head restraints may be removed.

131 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Fixed 2nd Row Seat: Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages Sliding 2nd Row Seat: The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it The lower anchorages are round bars that are There are tether strap anchorages behind

SAFETY meets the seatback, below the anchorage found at the rear of the seat cushion where it each rear seating position located on the symbols on the seatback. They are just visible meets the seatback. They are just visible back of the seat. when you lean into the rear seat to install the when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. seatback and seat cushion.

Tether Anchorage Locations

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible LATCH Anchorages — Fixed 2nd Row Seat strap on each side. Each will have a hook or Lower Anchors connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints 132 and some rear-facing child restraints will also can use either the LATCH anchors or the age, C. If the child seats do not block the be equipped with a tether strap. The tether vehicle’s seat belt for installing the third center seat belt webbing and buckle, the strap will have a hook at the end to attach to child seat in position (1) behind the front center seat belt can be used to restraint the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten passenger. an occupant or child restraint in the cen- the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. ter seating position. Center Seat LATCH 2. Right outboard and center seating posi- tions (1 and 2): Install the first child seat Sliding 2nd Row Seat: in the right outboard seating position us- This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages ing lower anchorages A and B. Install the in the rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used second child seat using the center anchor- for the right outboard position behind the ages, C and D. Do not use the outer front passenger (1). Anchorages D and E are anchorage closest to the opposite door, E. used for the left outboard position behind the Do not use the remaining left outboard driver (3). Anchorages C and D are used for seating position (3) for any occupant. The the center seating position (2). Do not install center child restraint will block the seat a LATCH-compatible child restraint using an- belt buckle for this position. chorages B and C. This is not a LATCH– compatible position in your vehicle. Sliding Second Row Seat Lower Anchors WARNING!

You can install up to two child seats using the Options for installing two child seats using • Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH system at the same time. If you can fit the LATCH anchorages in this vehicle: LATCH-compatible child restraint in three child restraints in your vehicle, you the center seating position (2). Do not must use the seat belt to install the center 1. Right and left outboard seating positions install a LATCH-compatible child re- child restraint and you must use the LATCH (1 and 3): Install the child seats in the straint using anchorages B and C. This anchors for position (3) behind the driver. You right and left outboard seating positions is not a LATCH-compatible position in using lower anchorages A and B, and D your vehicle. and E. Do not use the center seat anchor- 133 outboard seating positions. Child restraints WARNING! with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- WARNING! • A child restraint installed in the center ments can be installed in any rear seating can then use either the LATCH anchors or position (2) will block the seat belt position. the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child SAFETY buckle for the empty left outboard seat seats in the outboard positions. Please behind the driver (3). Do not use this refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible seat for another occupant. Child Restraint System” for typical instal- • Never use the same lower anchorage to lation instructions. attach more than one child restraint. • If you are installing three child re- Always follow the directions of the child re- straints next to each other, you must straint manufacturer when installing your child use the seat belt and the center tether restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be anchor for the center position. You installed as described here. must use the LATCH anchors to install To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re- the child seat in position (3), behind the driver. You may use either the straint LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat If the selected seating position has a Switch- belt for installing the child seat in po- able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat sition (1), behind the front passenger. Fixed Second Row Seat LATCH Positions belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc- Please refer to “Installing the LATCH- tions below. See the section “Installing Child Compatible Child Restraint System” Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to for typical installation instructions. WARNING! check what type of seat belt each seating Never use the same lower anchorage to Fixed 2nd Row Seat: position has. attach more than one child restraint. If you 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps Do not install child restraints with rigid lower are installing LATCH-compatible child re- and on the tether strap of the child seat so attachments in the center seating position. straints next to each other, you must use that you can more easily attach the hooks Only install this type of child restraint in the the seat belt for the center position. You or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 134 2. Place the child seat between the lower 6. Test that the child restraint is installed anchorages for that seating position. For tightly by pulling back and forth on the WARNING! some second row seats, you may need to child seat at the belt path. It should not • Improper installation of a child restraint recline the seat and / or raise the head move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any to the LATCH anchorages can lead to restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat direction. failure of the restraint. The child could can be moved forward and rearward in the be badly injured or killed. Follow the How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR vehicle, you may wish to move it to its child restraint manufacturer’s directions rear-most position to make room for the (ALR) Seat Belt: exactly when installing an infant or child child seat. You may also move the front When using the LATCH attaching system to restraint. seat forward to allow more room for the install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat • Child restraint anchorages are designed child seat. belts that are not being used by other occu- to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un- 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of pants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they der no circumstances are they to be used the child restraint to the lower anchorages for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt in the selected seating position. attaching other items or equipment to retractor. Before installing a child restraint the vehicle. 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt connect it to the top tether anchorage. behind the child restraint and out of the See the section “Installing Child Re- Installing Child Restraints Using The Ve- child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter- hicle Seat Belt straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” feres with the child restraint installation, in- for directions to attach a tether anchor. stead of buckling it behind the child re- Child restraint systems are designed to be 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the straint, route the seat belt through the child secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap child restraint rearward and downward restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. into the seat. Remove slack in the straps lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the according to the child restraint manufac- vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and turer’s instructions. that they should not play with them.

135 Please see the table below and the following WARNING! sections for more information. • Improper installation or failure to prop- Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing erly secure a child restraint can lead to SAFETY Child Restraints In This Vehicle failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. • Follow the child restraint manufactur- er’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de- signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR Locations (Fixed Seat) retractor can be “switched” into a locked ALR = Switchable Locking Retractor mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Sliding Seat) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR ALR = Switchable Locking Retractor will make a clicking noise while the webbing Top Tether Anchorage Symbol is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de- scription in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Re- straint Systems” for additional information on ALR. 136 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Always use the tether anchor when using the weight of the child restraint) for using the seat belt to install a forward facing child re- Weight limit of the Child Restraint Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a straint, up to the recommended weight limit of forward facing child restraint? the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child re- back of the front passenger seat? straint manufacturer also allows contact. Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All rear head restraints may be removed. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi- seat belt against the belt path of the child re- No tion with an ALR retractor. straint?

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch- tion to make room for the child seat. You WARNING! able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): may also move the front seat forward to • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s allow more room for the child seat. Child restraint systems are designed to be directions exactly when installing an in- secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap fant or child restraint. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. the retractor to pass it through the belt 1. Place the child seat in the center of the path of the child restraint. Do not twist the WARNING! seating position. For some second row belt webbing in the belt path. seats, you may need to recline the seat 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until • Improper installation or failure to prop- and/or raise the head restraint to get a you hear a “click.” erly secure a child restraint can lead to better fit. If the rear seat can be moved failure of the restraint. The child could forward and rearward in the vehicle, you 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap be badly injured or killed. may wish to move it to its rear-most posi- portion tight against the child seat.

137 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the 9. Test that the child restraint is installed shoulder part of the belt until you have tightly by pulling back and forth on the WARNING! pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the child seat at the belt path. It should not Restraint System” for the location of ap- retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re- move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any proved tether anchorages in your vehicle. SAFETY tract back into the retractor. As the web- direction. bing retracts, you will hear a clicking Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so sound. This means the seat belt is now in check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if the Automatic Locking mode. necessary. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top If it is locked, you should not be able to Tether Anchorage pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. WARNING! 1. Look behind the seating position where 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to you plan to install the child restraint to tighten the lap portion around the child Do not attach a tether strap for a rear- facing car seat to any location in front of find the tether anchorage. You may need restraint while you push the child restraint the car seat, including the seat frame or a to move the seat forward to provide better rearward and downward into the vehicle tether anchorage. Only attach the tether access to the tether anchorage. If there is seat. strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether no top tether anchorage for that seating 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap anchorage that is approved for that seating position, move the child restraint to an- and the seating position has a top tether position, located behind the top of the other position in the vehicle if one is vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An- anchorage, connect the tether strap to the available. anchorage and tighten the tether strap. chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most See the section “Installing Child Re- direct path for the strap between the an- straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is for directions to attach a tether anchor. equipped with adjustable rear head re- straints, raise the head restraint, and 138 where possible, route the tether strap un- 4. Remove slack in the tether strap accord- SAFETY TIPS der the head restraint and between the ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s two posts. If not possible, lower the head instructions. restraint and pass the tether strap around Transporting Passengers the outboard side of the head restraint. WARNING! NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE • An incorrectly anchored tether strap CARGO AREA. could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the WARNING! anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top • Do not leave children or animals inside tether strap. parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior • If your vehicle is equipped with a split heat build-up may cause serious injury rear seat, make sure the tether strap or death. does not slip into the opening between • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a the seatbacks as you remove slack in the cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. strap. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously Transporting Pets injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of Air Bags deploying in the front seat could your vehicle that is not equipped with harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be Tether Anchorage Locations seats and seat belts. thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child passenger during panic braking or in a colli- seat and using a seat belt properly. restraint to the top tether anchorage as sion. shown in the diagram. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. 139 Exhaust Gas The best protection against carbon monoxide Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced entry into the vehicle body is a properly after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies WARNING! maintained engine exhaust system. must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- SAFETY Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con- Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col- the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can seat belt or retractor condition, replace the orless and odorless. Breathing it can make be detected inside the vehicle, or when the seat belt. you unconscious and can eventually poi- underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light these safety tips: plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar- The Air Bag warning light will turn on for • Do not run the engine in a closed garage eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or four to eight seconds as a bulb check when or in confined areas any longer than mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. needed to move your vehicle in or out of connections could permit exhaust fumes to If the light is either not on during starting, the area. seep into the passenger compartment. In stays on, or turns on while driving, have the • If you are required to drive with the addition, inspect the exhaust system each system inspected at your authorized dealer as trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil soon as possible. After the bulb check, this sure that all windows are closed and the change. Replace as required. light will illuminate with a single chime when climate control BLOWER switch is set at a fault with the Air Bag System has been Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside high speed. DO NOT use the recircula- detected. It will stay on until the fault is tion mode. The Vehicle removed. If the light comes on intermittently • If it is necessary to sit in a parked or remains on while driving, have your autho- vehicle with the engine running, adjust rized dealer service the vehicle immediately. your heating or cooling controls to force Seat Belts outside air into the vehicle. Set the Inspect the seat belt system periodically, Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in blower at high speed. checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. “Safety” for further information. Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- ately. Do not disassemble or modify the sys- tem. 140 Defroster WARNING! WARNING! Check operation by selecting the defrost control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or clutch pedal (if present) to check for mode and place the blower control on high DEATH: interference. If your floor mat interferes speed. You should be able to feel the air • ALWAYS securely attach your floor with the operation of any pedal, or is not directed against the windshield. See your mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO secure to the floor, remove the floor mat authorized dealer for service if your defroster NOT install your floor mat upside down from the vehicle and place the floor mat is inoperable. or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to in your trunk. confirm mat is secured using the floor • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat Floor Mat Safety Information mat fasteners on a regular basis. on the passenger’s side floor area. Always use floor mats designed to fit your • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE slide into the driver’s side floor area interfere with the operation of the accelera- before installing any other floor mat. when the vehicle is moving. Objects can tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor NEVER install or stack an additional become trapped under accelerator, mat that is securely attached using the floor floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. brake, or clutch pedals and could cause mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit a loss of vehicle control. your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat • NEVER place any objects under the floor and interfere with the accelerator, brake or that cannot be properly attached and mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob- clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat jects could change the position of the vehicle in other ways. needs to be replaced, only use a FCA floor mat and may cause interference approved floor mat for the specific with the accelerator, brake, or clutch WARNING! make, model, and year of your vehicle. pedals. An improperly attached, damaged, folded, • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on • If the vehicle carpet has been removed or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat the driver’s side floor area. To check for and re-installed, always properly attach fasteners may cause your floor mat to in- interference, with the vehicle properly carpet to the floor and check the floor terfere with the accelerator, brake, or parked with the engine off, fully depress mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle the accelerator, the brake, and the carpet. Fully depress each pedal to

141 Lights WARNING! check for interference with the accelera- Have someone observe the operation of brake tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re- lights and exterior lights while you work the

SAFETY install the floor mats. controls. Check turn signal and high beam • It is recommended to only use mild soap indicator lights on the instrument panel. and water to clean your floor mats. After Door Latches cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is se- Check for proper closing, latching, and lock- cured to your vehicle using the floor mat ing. fasteners by lightly pulling mat. Fluid Leaks Check area under the vehicle after overnight Periodic Safety Checks YouShould Make parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid Outside The Vehicle leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The Tires cause should be located and corrected imme- Examine tires for excessive tread wear and diately. uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

142 Tip Start Feature STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A Place the ignition in the START mode and adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and child could operate power windows, release it as the starter engages. The starter fasten your seat belts. other controls, or move the vehicle. motor will automatically disengage itself once engine is running. If the engine fails to WARNING! Start the engine with the gear selector in the start, the starter will disengage automatically NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake in 10 seconds. If this occurs: before shifting to any driving range. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove 1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode. the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine 2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds. Enter-N-Go, always make sure the key- NOTE: 3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. less ignition node is in “OFF” mode, Normal starting of either a cold or a warm remove the key fob from the vehicle and engine is obtained without pumping or push- ENGINE BREAK-IN lock the vehicle. ing the accelerator pedal. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, RECOMMENDATIONS or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Place your foot on the brake and place the A long break-in period is not required for the • Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- ignition to the START mode and release when engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) attended is dangerous for a number of the engine starts. If the engine fails to start in your vehicle. reasons. A child or others could be seri- within 10 seconds: ously or fatally injured. Children should Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode. be warned not to touch the parking (500 km). After the initial 60 miles brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. 2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds. (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or • Do not leave the key fob in or near the 3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. 90 km/h) are desirable. vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-

143 While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration PARKING BRAKE To release the park brake manually, the igni- within the limits of local traffic laws contrib- tion must be in ON/RUN. Then put your foot utes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle Electric Park Brake (EPB) on the brake pedal and push the park brake acceleration in low gear can be detrimental switch down momentarily. Once the park Your vehicle is equipped with a new Electric and should be avoided. brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE telltale Park Brake System (EPB) that offers greater light and the switch indicator will extinguish. The engine oil installed in the engine at the convenience. The park brake switch is lo- factory is a high-quality energy conserving cated in the center console. The park brake can also be automatically type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis- released. With the engine running and the tent with anticipated climate conditions un- transmission in gear, release the brake pedal der which vehicle operations will occur. and depress the throttle pedal. For safety reasons, your seat belt must also be fastened. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in NOTE: “Technical Specifications”.

STARTING AND OPERATING • You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking CAUTION! brake engages or disengages. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight • If your foot is on the brake pedal while you Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may are engaging or disengaging the parking result. brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. NOTE: • The new Auto Park Brake feature can be A new engine may consume some oil during Parking Brake Switch used to apply the park brake automatically its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of To apply the park brake manually, pull up on every time you park the vehicle. Auto Park operation. This should be considered a nor- the switch momentarily. The BRAKE telltale Brake can be enabled and disabled in the mal part of the break-in and not interpreted light in the instrument cluster and an indica- Settings menu in Uconnect. as a problem. tor on the switch will illuminate. 144 • The parking brake can be engaged even when the ignition is OFF, however, it can WARNING! WARNING! only be disengaged when the ignition is in the vehicle to guard against vehicle • Always fully apply the parking brake the ON/RUN mode. movement and possible injury or dam- when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll age. and cause damage or injury. Also be • SafeHold a new feature that will automati- • When exiting the vehicle, always make certain to leave the transmission in cally apply the park brake under certain sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, PARK. Failure to do so may allow the conditions. The EPB monitors the status of remove the key fob from the vehicle, and vehicle to roll and cause damage or in- the driver’s seat belt, driver’s door and lock your vehicle. jury. pedal positions to determine if the driver • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, • Driving the vehicle with the parking may have exited while the vehicle is still or with access to an unlocked vehicle. brake engaged, or repeated use of the capable of moving and will then automati- Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- parking brake to slow the vehicle may cally apply the park brake to prevent the attended is dangerous for a number of cause serious damage to the brake sys- vehicle from rolling. reasons. A child or others could be seri- tem. • The EPB fault light will illuminate if the ously or fatally injured. Children should EPB switch is held for longer than 90 sec- be warned not to touch the parking CAUTION! onds in either the released or applied posi- brake, brake pedal or the transmission tion. The light will extinguish upon releas- gear selector. If the Brake System Warning Light remains ing the switch. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the on with the parking brake released, a brake vehicle, (or in a location accessible to • Refer to the Starting And Operating section system malfunction is indicated. Have the in the Owner’s Manual. children), and do not leave the ignition brake system serviced by an authorized in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child dealer immediately. could operate power windows, other con- WARNING! trols, or move the vehicle. Auto Park Brake • Never use the PARK position as a sub- • Be sure the parking brake is fully disen- gaged before driving; failure to do so can The electric park brake can be programmed stitute for the parking brake. Always ap- to be applied automatically whenever the ply the parking brake fully when exiting lead to brake failure and a collision. vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic 145 transmission is placed in PARK, whenever the driver door is open. Once manually by- the ignition is turned “OFF”. Auto Park Brake passed, SafeHold will be enabled again once WARNING! is enabled and disabled by customer selec- the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the come to a complete stop, then apply the tion through the customer programmable fea- ignition is turned to the OFF position and parking brake, shift the transmission tures section of the Uconnect Settings. back to ON again. into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is Any single auto park brake application can be in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the AUTOMATIC (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the release position while the transmission is TRANSMISSION ignition is in the OFF mode) the trans- placed in PARK. mission is locked in PARK, securing the SafeHold WARNING! vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always make SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, Park Brake System that will engage the park NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher remove the key fob from the vehicle, and brake automatically if the vehicle is left un- than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly lock the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING secured while the ignition is in ON/RUN. pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle • Never use the PARK position as a sub- For automatic transmissions, the park brake could accelerate quickly forward or in stitute for the parking brake. Always will automatically engage if all of the follow- reverse. You could lose control of the apply the parking brake fully when exit- ing conditions are met: vehicle and hit someone or something. ing the vehicle to guard against vehicle Only shift into gear when the engine is movement and possible injury or dam- • The vehicle is at a standstill. idling normally and your foot is firmly age. • There is no attempt to depress the brake pressing the brake pedal. • Your vehicle could move and injure you pedal or accelerator pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle and others if it is not in PARK. Check by could injure those in or near the vehicle. • The seat belt is unbuckled. trying to move the gear selector out of As with all vehicles, you should never PARK with the brake pedal released. • The driver door is open. exit a vehicle while the engine is run- Make sure the transmission is in PARK SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always before exiting the vehicle. pushing the Electric Park Brake Switch while 146 WARNING! CAUTION! Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE or with access to an unlocked vehicle. only after the vehicle has come to a This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans- Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- complete stop. mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that attended is dangerous for a number of • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, holds the transmission gear selector in PARK reasons. A child or others could be seri- NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is unless the brakes are applied. To shift the ously or fatally injured. Children should above idle speed. transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be warned not to touch the parking • Before shifting into any gear, make sure be in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or brake, brake pedal or the transmission your foot is firmly pressing the brake not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. gear selector. pedal. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift vehicle (or in a location accessible to NOTE: from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE children), and do not leave the ignition You must press and hold the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless while shifting out of PARK. speeds. Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission mode. A child could operate power win- Key Ignition Park Interlock dows, other controls, or move the ve- This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition The transmission gear range (PRND) is dis- hicle. Park Interlock which requires the transmis- played both beside the gear selector and in sion to be in PARK before the ignition can be the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, CAUTION! turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) posi- press the lock button on the gear selector and tion. The key fob can only be removed from move the selector rearward or forward. You Damage to the transmission may occur if the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/ must also press the brake pedal to shift the the following precautions are not ob- OFF position, and the transmission is locked transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, served: in PARK whenever the ignition is in the when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low LOCK/OFF position. speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. 147 NOTE: Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear when the accelerator pedal is released and If the gear selector cannot be moved to the selector position and the actual transmission the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE foot on the brake pedal when shifting be- (when pushed forward) it is probably in the while driving forward), the position indicator tween these gears. MANUAL (AutoStick,(+/-)) position (beside will blink continuously until the selector is the DRIVE position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) The transmission gear selector provides returned to the proper position, or the re- mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and quested shift can be completed. displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] The electronically-controlled transmission downshifts can be made using the AutoStick position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and adapts its shift schedule based on driver shift control. Moving the gear selector into NEUTRAL. inputs, along with environmental and road the MANUAL (-/+) position (beside the conditions. The transmission electronics are DRIVE position) activates AutoStick mode, self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts providing manual shift control and displaying

STARTING AND OPERATING on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. the current gear in the instrument cluster (as This is a normal condition, and precision 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the gear selector shifts will develop within a few hundred miles forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the (kilometers). MANUAL position will manually select the transmission gear. The nine-speed transmission has been devel- oped to meet the needs of current and future Refer to “AutoStick” in the Owner’s Manual. FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations uti- lize 9th gear only in very specific driving situations and conditions. Gear Selector

148 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE CAUTION! OPERATION All wheels must have the same size and 1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4X4) — If type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be Equipped used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit. This feature provides on-demand four-wheel drive (4X4). The system is automatic with no 2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4x4) — If driver inputs or additional driving skills re- Equipped quired. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels. 1-Speed 4X4 Switch Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics.

2-Speed 4x4 Switch

149 allows for increased torque to be delivered to NEUTRAL both the front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is This range disengages the driveline from the intended for loose, slippery road surfaces powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing only. Driving in 4WD LOW on dry, hard- behind another vehicle. surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the normal driving mode at a WARNING! given road speed. Take care not to overspeed You or others could be injured or killed if the engine and do not exceed 50 mph you leave the vehicle unattended with the (80 km/h). power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles position without first fully engaging the

STARTING AND OPERATING 2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock) depends on tires of equal size, type, and parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position circumference on each wheel. Any difference disengages both the front and rear drive- The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in will adversely affect shifting and cause dam- shafts from the powertrain and will allow the normal driving mode. The Selec-Terrain age to the driveline components. the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission buttons provide three selectable mode posi- is in PARK. The parking brake should Because four-wheel drive provides improved tions: always be applied when the driver is not in traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe the vehicle. • 4WD LOW turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster • REAR LOCK (If Equipped) than road conditions permit. 4WD LOW • NEUTRAL Shift Positions This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It provides an additional gear reduction When additional traction is required, the For additional information on the appropriate which allows for increased torque to be deliv- 4WD LOW range position can be used to use of each 4WD system mode position, see provide an additional gear reduction which the information below: 150 ered to both the front and rear wheels while Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW providing maximum pulling power for loose, With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 5 km/h), the ignition in the ON mode and the 25 mph (40 km/h). engine running, shift the transmission into NOTE: NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW” button Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the further information on the various positions instrument cluster will flash and go out when and their intended usages. the shift is complete. Shifting Procedures NOTE:

Shifting Into 4X4 LOW • If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a message will flash from the instrument With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to cluster display with instructions on how to 5 km/h), the ignition in the ON mode and the Selec-Terrain Switch complete the requested shift. Refer to “In- engine running, shift the transmission into strument Cluster Display” in “Getting To NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW” button NOTE: Know Your Instrument Panel” for further once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a information. instrument cluster will begin to flash and message will flash from the instrument clus- • Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible remain on solid when the shift is complete. ter display with instructions on how to com- with the vehicle completely stopped; how- plete the requested shift. ever, difficulty may occur due to the mating Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in clutch teeth not being properly aligned. “Getting To know Your Instrument Panel” for Several attempts may be required for further information. clutch teeth alignment and shift comple- tion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h).

151 If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 7. After the shift is completed and the NEU- (5 km/h), the 4WD system will not allow the 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU- shift. push and hold the recessed power transfer TRAL (N) button. NEUTRAL Shift Procedure unit NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the 8. Start the engine. selector switch) for four seconds. The 9. Release the parking brake. WARNING! light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol will blink, indicating shift in progress. The 10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. You or others could be injured or killed if light will stop blinking (stay on solid) 11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds you leave the vehicle unattended with the when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is and ensure that there is no vehicle power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) complete. movement. position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position 12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. disengages both the front and rear drive- 13. Apply the parking brake. shafts from the powertrain and will allow STARTING AND OPERATING the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission 14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn is in PARK. The parking brake should the engine OFF, and remove the key kob. always be applied when the driver is not in Repeat steps 1-7 to shift out of NEUTRAL. the vehicle. NOTE: 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on When towing this vehicle behind another ve- level ground and shift the transmission to hicle, the Mopar flat tow wiring kit must be PARK. used, and the parking brake must be re- 2. Turn the engine OFF. leased. 3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting but do not start the engine. Neutral Switch and Operating" for further instructions. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. 152 Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker) System NOTE: — If Equipped • It may also be necessary to drive slowly The Rear E-Locker System features a me- steering back and forth to complete en- chanical locking rear differential to provide gagement and disengagement of the E-Locker. better traction in the 4WD LOW position. The “REAR LOCK” button is on the Selec-Terrain • When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indica- Knob. tor lights in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. Activating The Rear E-Locker When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the indicator lights will remain on. following conditions must be met: • When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indi- 1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW. cator lights in the instrument cluster and on the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. 2. The ignition in the ON mode and the Rear Lock Button When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK engine running. indicator lights will remain off. Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System 3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 MPH • Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is (24 km/h). To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the possible with the vehicle completely 4. To engage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR following conditions must be met: stopped; however, difficulty may occur due LOCK button once. 1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the to the mating clutch teeth not being prop- REAR LOCK indicator light on. erly aligned. Several attempts may be re- quired for clutch teeth alignment and shift 2. The ignition in the ON mode and the completion to occur. The preferred method engine running. is for the vehicle to be rolling, below 3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, push the 15 MPH (24 km/h), while including right REAR LOCK button once. and left steering maneuvers to allow for the clutch teeth to align. 153 • The Rear E-Locker System must be disen- tain operating conditions), the transmis- gaged prior to taking the vehicle out of 4WD sion may use second gear (rather than first LOW range. If 4WD LOW shift conditions/ gear) during launches, to minimize wheel interlocks are not met, a message will flash slippage. from the instrument cluster display with • Sport — This mode alters the transmis- instructions on how to complete the re- sion's automatic shift schedule for sportier quested shift. driving. Upshift speeds are increased to SELEC-TERRAIN make full use of available engine power. NOTE: Description SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of is selected. the vehicle control systems, along with driver • Sand/Mud — Off-road calibration for use on input, to provide the best performance for all low traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or STARTING AND OPERATING Selec-Terrain Switch terrains. wet grass. Driveline is maximized for trac- Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the Selec-Terrain offers the following modes: tion. Some binding may be felt on less desired mode. • Auto — Fully automatic full time four-wheel forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake drive operation can be used on and off road. controls are set to limit traction control Balances traction with seamless steering management of throttle and wheel spin. feel to provide improved handling and ac- • Rock — Off-road calibration only available celeration over two-wheel drive vehicles. in 4WD LOW range. Traction based tuning • Snow — Tuning set for additional stability with improved steer-ability for use on high in inclement weather. Use on and off road traction off-road surfaces. Use for low on loose traction surfaces such as snow. speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep When in SNOW mode (depending on cer- ruts, etc.

154 NOTE: and if all other conditions are met, can go Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not • Rock mode is only available on the vehicles into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Au- Autostop tostop” mode. equipped with the Off-Road package. Prior to engine shut down, the system will • Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following check many safety and comfort conditions to Speed Control for steep downhill control. Must Occur: see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system See “Electronic Brake Control System” in • The system must be in STOP/START may be viewed in the instrument cluster dis- “Safety” for further information. READY state. A STOP/START READY mes- sage will be displayed in the instrument play Stop/Start Screen. In the following situ- STOP/START SYSTEM cluster display within the Stop/Start sec- ations the engine will not stop: tion. Refer to “Warning Lights And Mes- • Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. The Stop/Start function was developed to sages” in “Getting To Know Your Instru- reduce fuel consumption. The system will ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual. • Driver’s door is not closed. stop the engine automatically during a ve- • The vehicle must be completely stopped. • Battery temperature is too warm or cold. hicle stop if the required conditions are met. • The gear selector must be in a forward gear • Battery charge is low. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the and the brake pedal depressed. accelerator pedal will automatically restart • The vehicle is on a steep grade. the engine. The engine will shut down, the tachometer • Cabin heating or cooling is in process and will move to the zero position and the Stop/ an acceptable cabin temperature has not This vehicle has been upgraded with a Heavy Start telltale will illuminate indicating you been achieved. Duty Battery, Starter, as well as other engine are in Autostop. Customer settings will be parts, to handle the Additional engine starts. • HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high maintained upon return to an engine running blower speed. Automatic Mode condition. • HVAC set to MAX A/C. Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every • Engine has not reached normal operating “Starting And Operating” in your Owner’s normal customer engine start. At that time, temperature. the system will go into STOP/START READY Manual. 155 • The transmission is not in a forward or ToStart The Engine While In Autostop Conditions That Force An Application Of The reverse gear. Mode Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode: • Hood is open. While in a forward gear, the engine will start • The driver’s door is open and brake pedal • Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode (if when the brake pedal is released or the released. equipped with 4WD). throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission • The driver’s door is open and the driver’s • Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient will automatically re-engage upon engine re- seat belt is unbuckled. pressure with vehicle in DRIVE position. start. • The engine hood has been opened. Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop In- Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start • A STOP/START system error occurs. clude: Automatically While In Autostop Mode: If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the • Accelerator pedal input. • The transmission gear selector is moved out engine off, the engine may require a manual of DRIVE except in the PARK position. • Engine temp too high. restart and the electric park brake may re- • To maintain cabin temperature comfort. quire a manual release (depress brake pedal

STARTING AND OPERATING • 5 mph threshold not achieved from previ- • HVAC is set to full defrost mode. and push Electric Park Brake switch). Refer ous AUTOSTOP. to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting • Steering angle beyond threshold. • HVAC system temperature or fan speed is To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Own- manually adjusted. • ACC is on and speed is set. er’s Manual. • Battery voltage drops too low. It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven ToManually TurnOff The Stop/Start • Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake several times without the STOP/START sys- System pedal applications). tem going into a STOP/START READY state 1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located • STOP/START OFF switch is pushed. under more extreme conditions of the items on the switch bank). The light on the listed above. • A STOP/START system error occurs. switch will illuminate. • 4WD system is put into 4LO mode (if equipped with 4WD).

156 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off SPEED CONTROL the STOP/START system), the engine will not be stopped. The Speed Control switches are located on the right side of the steering wheel. 4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to the ON mode every time the igni- tion is turned off and back on. ToManually TurnOn The Stop/Start System Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off. For complete details on the Stop/Start Sys- STOP/START OFF Switch tem, refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the “Starting And Operating” section located in 2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will ap- your Owner’s Manual. pear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” Speed Control Switches in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual. 1 — Push On/Off 2 — Push Set (+)/Accel 3 — Push Resume 4 — Push Set (-)/Decel 5 — Push Cancel

157 Activation selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a U.S. Speed (mph) message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result Push the on/off button to activate the Speed (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each Control, “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will was set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with subsequent tap of the button results in an appear on the instrument cluster display to set speed will also appear and stay on in the increase of 1 mph. indicate the Speed Control is on. Push the instrument cluster display when the speed is on/off button a second time to turn the sys- set. • If the button is continually pushed, the set tem off, “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will ap- speed will continue to increase until the pear on the instrument cluster display to Varying The Speed button is released, then the new set speed indicate the Speed Control is off. The system Once the Speed Control has been activated, will be established. should be turned off when not in use. the speed can be increased or decreased. Metric Speed (km/h) WARNING! To Increase Speed • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result When the Speed Control is set, you can in- in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each Leaving the Speed Control system on when STARTING AND OPERATING crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button. subsequent tap of the button results in an not in use is dangerous. You could acci- increase of 1 km/h. dentally set the system or cause it to go The driver's preferred units can be selected • If the button is continually pushed, the set faster than you want. You could lose con- through the instrument panel settings if speed will continue to increase until the trol and have an accident. Always leave the equipped. The speed increment shown is button is released, then the new set speed system off when you are not using it. dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. will be established. (mph) or Metric (km/h).Refer to “Getting To Setting A Desired Speed Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s To Decrease Speed Manual for more information. Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle When the Speed Control is set, you can de- has reached the desired speed, push the SET crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the The driver's preferred units can be selected accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the through the instrument panel settings if equipped. The speed increment shown is 158 dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. Resume couple of differences. With this option, you (mph) or Metric (km/h). Refer to “Getting To can set a specified distance you would like to To resume a previously selected set speed in Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s maintain between you and the vehicle in front memory, push and release the RES button. Manual for more information. of you. U.S. Speed (mph) Accelerating For Passing • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result Press the accelerator as you would normally. in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each When the pedal is released, the vehicle will subsequent tap of the button results in a return to the set speed. decrease of 1 mph. Deactivation • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the button is released, then the new set speed CANC button, or normal brake pressure while will be established. slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from Metric Speed (km/h) memory. • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result Pushing the on/off button or turning the igni- in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each tion switch OFF erases the set speed from Adaptive Cruise Switches subsequent tap of the button results in a memory. decrease of 1 km/h. 1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/ • If the button is continually pushed, the set ADAPTIVE CRUISE Off 2 — Distance Setting – Decrease speed will continue to decrease until the CONTROL (ACC) 3 — Distance Setting – Increase button is released, then the new set speed will be established. If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control, the controls operate exactly the same as the Speed Control with only a 159 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, NOTE: • When you use the SET (-) button to decel- ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary erate, if the engine’s braking power does automatically to maintain a preset following vehicle in front of your vehicle in close prox- not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach distance, while matching the speed of the imity. the set speed, the brake system will auto- vehicle ahead. matically slow the vehicle. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead If you do not, the vehicle may continue to • The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle. of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. accelerate beyond the set speed. If this oc- If an ACC host vehicle follows a target curs: Activation vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle will • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will release the vehicle brakes two seconds af- Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control appear in the instrument cluster display. ter coming to a full stop. (ACC) on/off button. • The system will not be controlling the dis- • The ACC system maintains set speed when “ACC READY” will appear in the instrument tance between your vehicle and the vehicle driving up hill and down hill. However, a cluster display to indicate the ACC is on. ahead. The vehicle speed will only be de- slight speed change on moderate hills is STARTING AND OPERATING termined by the position of the accelerator normal. In addition, downshifting may oc- Setting A Desired ACC Speed pedal. cur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and nec- When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, Varying The Speed essary to maintain set speed. When driving push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button up hill and down hill, the ACC system will and release. The instrument cluster display Once the ACC has been activated, the speed cancel if the braking temperature exceeds will show the set speed. can be increased or decreased. normal range (overheated). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is NOTE: To Increase Speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall • When you override and push the SET (+) be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the While ACC is set, you can increase the set button or SET (-) buttons, the new set system is set when the vehicle speed is above speed by pushing the SET (+) button. speed will be the current speed of the 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the vehicle. The driver's preferred units can be selected current speed of the vehicle. through the instrument panel settings if 160 equipped. The speed increment shown is To Decrease Speed subsequent tap of the button results in a dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. decrease of 1 km/h. While ACC is set, the set speed can be de- (mph) or Metric (km/h). Refer to “Getting To creased by pushing the SET (-) button. • If the button is continually pushed, the set Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h Manual for further information. The driver's preferred units can be selected decrements until the button is released. through the instrument panel settings if U.S. Speed (mph) The decrease in set speed is reflected in the equipped. The speed increment shown is instrument cluster display. • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each (mph) or Metric (km/h). Refer to “Getting To Resume subsequent tap of the button results in an Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s If there is a set speed in memory, push the increase of 1 mph. Manual for further information. RES (resume) button and remove your foot • If the button is continually pushed, the set U.S. Speed (mph) from the accelerator pedal. The instrument speed will continue to increase in 5 mph cluster display will show the last set speed. increments until the button is released. The • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result increase in set speed is reflected in the in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each NOTE: subsequent tap of the button results in a instrument cluster display. • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer decrease of 1 mph. Metric Speed (km/h) than two seconds, the driver will either have • If the button is continually pushed, the set to push the RES (resume) button or apply • Pushing the SET (+) button once will result speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each decrements until the button is released. to the existing set speed. subsequent tap of the button results in an The decrease in set speed is reflected in the increase of 1 km/h. • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a station- instrument cluster display. ary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h Metric Speed (km/h) proximity. increments until the button is released. The • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result increase in set speed is reflected in the in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each instrument cluster display. 161 ACC calculates and sets the distance to the Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the WARNING! vehicle ahead. This distance setting appears ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise The Resume function should only be used in the instrument cluster display. Control off. if traffic and road conditions permit. Re- • To increase the distance setting, push the • Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise suming a set speed that is too high or too Distance Setting—Increase button and re- Control on/off button will result in turning low for prevailing traffic and road condi- lease. Each time the button is pushed, the on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) tions could cause the vehicle to accelerate distance setting increases by one bar (lon- Cruise Control mode. or decelerate too sharply for safe opera- ger). Refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Con- tion. Failure to follow these warnings can trol Mode” in “Starting And Operating” in result in a collision and death or serious • To decrease the distance setting, push the personal injury. Distance Setting—Decrease button and re- your Owner's Manual for further information. lease. Each time the button is pushed, the Deactivation distance setting decreases by one bar WARNING! (shorter). Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve- STARTING AND OPERATING (ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the Changing Modes nience system. It is not a substitute for system off. active driving involvement. It is always the If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode driver’s responsibility to be attentive of “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will ap- can be turned off and the system can be road, traffic, and weather conditions, ve- pear in the instrument cluster display to operated as a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise hicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; indicate the ACC is off. Control mode. When in the Normal (Fixed and, most importantly, brake operation to Speed) Cruise Control mode the distance ensure safe operation of the vehicle under Setting The Following Distance setting feature will be disabled and the sys- all road conditions. Your complete atten- The specified following distance for ACC can tem will maintain the speed you set. tion is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Fail- be set by varying the distance setting be- • To change between the different cruise ure to follow these warnings can result in a tween four bars (longest), three bars (long), control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise collision and death or serious personal two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using injury. this distance setting and the vehicle speed, 162 WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! The ACC system: driving situations (i.e., in highway con- trol buttons. The two control modes func- • Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming struction zones). tion differently. Always confirm which vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a • When entering a turn lane or highway off mode is selected. stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a ramp; when driving on roads that are disabled vehicle). winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or General Information • Cannot take street, traffic, and weather have steep uphill or downhill slopes. The following regulatory statement applies to conditions into account, and may be • When towing a trailer up or down steep limited upon adverse sight distance con- slopes. all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in ditions. • When circumstances do not allow safe this vehicle: • Does not always fully recognize complex driving at a constant speed. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC driving conditions, which can result in The Cruise Control system has two control Rules and with Industry Canada license- wrong or missing distance warnings. modes: exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main- • Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop ject to the following two conditions: while following a target vehicle and hold taining an appropriate distance between the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop vehicles. 1. This device may not cause harmful position. If the target vehicle does not • Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control interference. start moving within two seconds the ACC mode for cruising at a constant preset 2. This device must accept any interference system will display a message that the speed. For additional information, refer received, including interference that may to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control system will release the brakes and that cause undesired operation. the brakes must be applied manually. An Mode” in your Owner’s Manual for fur- audible chime will sound when the ther information. NOTE: brakes are released. Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will Changes or modifications not expressly ap- You should switch off the ACC system: not react to preceding vehicles. Always be proved by the party responsible for compli- • When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy aware of the mode selected. You can ance could void the user’s authority to oper- snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex change the mode by using the Cruise Con- ate the equipment.

163 PARKSENSE REAR PARK Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in ASSIST the Owner’s Manual for more information. the Owner’s Manual for further information. ParkSense Sensors The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense System Usage Precautions The four ParkSense sensors, located in the ParkSense is disabled or requires service. NOTE: rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of the system is enabled. If the ParkSense • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, view. The sensors can detect obstacles from switch is pushed, and the system requires ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink ParkSense system operating properly. momentarily, and then the LED will be on. 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi- bumper in the horizontal direction, depend- Instrument Cluster Display brations could affect the performance of ing on the location, type and orientation of ParkSense. the obstacle. The ParkSense Warning screen will only be • When you turn ParkSense off, the instru- STARTING AND OPERATING displayed if Sound and Display is selected Activation/Deactivation ParkSense ment cluster display will read from the Customer - Programmable Features “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore, once ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with section of the Uconnect System. you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until the ParkSense switch . Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- you turn it on again, even if you cycle the When the ParkSense switch is pushed to dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor- ignition. disable the system, the instrument cluster mation. • When you move the gear selector to the display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” REVERSE position and ParkSense is message for approximately five seconds. The ParkSense Warning screen is located turned off, the instrument cluster display When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE within the instrument cluster display. It pro- will show a “PARKSENSE OFF” message and the system is disabled, the instrument vides visual warnings to indicate the distance for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE between the rear fascia/bumper and the de- OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in tected obstacle. • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the vol- REVERSE. ume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. 164 • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, tak- ing care not to scratch or damage them. The WARNING! CAUTION! sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, • Drivers must be careful when backing up • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so even when using ParkSense. Always unable to recognize every obstacle, in- can result in the system not working prop- check carefully behind your vehicle, look cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs erly. The ParkSense system might not de- behind you, and be sure to check for might be temporarily detected or not tect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- detected at all. Obstacles located above or it could provide a false indication that an structions, and blind spots before back- or below the sensors will not be detected obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. ing up. You are responsible for safety when they are in close proximity. • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the and must continue to pay attention to • The vehicle must be driven slowly when ParkSense system OFF if objects such as your surroundings. Failure to do so can using ParkSense in order to be able to bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are result in serious injury or death. stop in time when an obstacle is de- placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly tected. It is recommended that the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can recommended that the ball mount and driver looks over his/her shoulder when result in the system misinterpreting a close hitch ball assembly is disconnected using ParkSense. object as a sensor problem, causing the from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE result in injury or damage to vehicles or REQUIRED” message to appear in the in- obstacles because the hitch ball will be strument cluster display. much closer to the obstacle than the rear • ParkSense should be disabled when the fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the liftgate is in the open position and the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could vehicle is in REVERSE. An open liftgate detect the ball mount and hitch ball could provide a false indication that an assembly, depending on its size and obstacle is behind the vehicle. shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

165 PARKSENSE FRONT AND a chime will sound (when Sound and Display cluster display indicating the vehicle is above is selected from the Customer Programmable ParkSense operating speed. The system will REAR PARK ASSIST Features section of the Uconnect System become active again if the vehicle speed is ParkSense Sensors screen). As the vehicle moves closer to the decreased to speeds less than approximately object, the chime rate will change from single 6 mph (9 km/h). The four ParkSense sensors, located in the 1/2 second tone (for rear only), to slow (for rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind rear only), to fast, to continuous. Engagement/Disengagement the vehicle that is within the sensors field of To disengage the system, push the ParkSense view. The sensors can detect obstacles from Activation/Deactivation switch, located on the switch panel below the approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to The ParkSense Park Assist system provides 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ Uconnect display. visual and audible indications of the distance bumper in the horizontal direction, depend- between the rear and/or front fascia and a When the system passes from engaged to ing on the location, type and orientation of detected obstacle when backing up or mov- disengaged and vice versa, it is always ac- the obstacle. ing forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. companied by a dedicated message in the

STARTING AND OPERATING The six ParkSense sensors, located in the If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic instrument cluster display. front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be au- System engaged: ParkSense switch LED off. of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field tomatically applied and released when per- of view. The sensors can detect obstacles forming a reverse parking maneuver if the System disengaged: ParkSense switch LED on from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to system detects a possible collision with an constantly. 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/ obstacle. The ParkSense switch LED lights up also in bumper in the horizontal direction, depend- ParkSense can be active only when the gear the case of a ParkSense system failure. If the ing on the location, type and orientation of selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If button is pushed with a system failure, the the obstacle. ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear ParkSense switch LED flashes for about five When an object is detected within 79 inches selector positions, the system will remain seconds, then it stays on constantly. (200 cm) behind the rear bumper while the active until the vehicle speed is increased to vehicle is in REVERSE, a warning will appear approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A in the instrument cluster display. In addition display warning will appear in the instrument 166 After the ParkSense has been disengaged, it PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the will stay in this condition until the following driver touches the steering wheel after be- engagement, even if the ignition device ASSIST SYSTEM — IF ing instructed to remove their hands from passes from ON/RUN to OFF and then again EQUIPPED the steering wheel, the system will cancel, to ON/RUN. and the driver will be required to manually The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is complete the parking maneuver. Operation With A Trailer intended to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by • The system may not work in all conditions The operation of the sensors is automatically identifying a proper parking space, providing (e.g. environmental conditions such as deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is audible/visual instructions, and controlling heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active parking space that has surfaces that will sensors are automatically reactivated when Park Assist system is defined as “semi- absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves). the trailer's cable plug is removed. automatic” since the driver maintains control • New vehicles from the dealer must have at of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. General Warnings least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before Depending on the driver's parking maneuver the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist fully calibrated and performs accurately. SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the in- into a parallel or a perpendicular parking calibration to improve the performance of space on either side (i.e., driver side or pas- strument cluster display, clean the the feature. The system will also continu- senger side). ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap ously perform the dynamic vehicle calibra- and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard NOTE: tion to account for differences such as over cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. or under inflated tires and new tires. • The driver is always responsible for control- Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ling the vehicle, responsible for any sur- rounding objects, and must intervene as required. • The system is provided to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver. 167 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can When both lane markings are detected and driver when the driver’s hands are not de- be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense the driver unintentionally drifts out of the tected on the steering wheel. The system will Active Park Assist switch, located on the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense cancel if the driver does not return their switch panel below the Uconnect display. system provides a haptic warning in the form hands to the wheel. of torque applied to the steering wheel, as To enable the ParkSense Active TurningLaneSense On Or Off Park Assist system, push the well as a visual warning in the instrument ParkSense Active Park Assist cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain The default status of LaneSense is “off”. within the lane boundaries. switch once (LED turns on). The LaneSense button is located on the To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist The driver may manually override the haptic switch panel below the Uconnect display. warning by applying torque into the steering system, push the ParkSense Active Park As- To turn the LaneSense system wheel at any time. sist switch again (LED turns off). on, push the LaneSense button Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further When only a single lane marking is detected (LED turns off). A “LaneSense information. and the driver unintentionally drifts across the On” message is shown in the STARTING AND OPERATING lane marking (no turn signal applied), the instrument cluster display. LaneSense system provides a visual warning LANESENSE To turn the LaneSense system off, push the through the instrument cluster display to LaneSense button once (LED turns on). LaneSense Operation prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a NOTE: The LaneSense system is operational at haptic (torque) warning will not be provided. The LaneSense system will retain the last speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below system state, on or off, from the last ignition 112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system NOTE: cycle when the ignition is changed to the uses a forward looking camera to detect lane When operating conditions have been met, ON/RUN position. markings and measure vehicle position the LaneSense system will monitor if the within the lane boundaries. driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual warning to the

168 LaneSense Warning Message NOTE: • When the LaneSense system senses the The LaneSense system operates with the lane has been approached and is in a lane The LaneSense system will indicate the cur- similar behavior for a right lane departure departure situation, the left thick lane line rent lane drift condition through the instru- when only the right lane marking has been flashes from white to gray, the left thin line ment cluster display. detected. remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flash- Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected ing yellow. At this time torque is applied to When the LaneSense system is on; the lane • When the LaneSense system is on, the lane the steering wheel in the opposite direction lines are gray when both of the lane bound- lines turn from gray to white to indicate that of the lane boundary. aries have not been detected and the Lane- both of the lane markings have been de- For example: If approaching the left side of Sense telltale is solid white. tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid the lane the steering wheel will turn to the Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected green when both lane markings have been right. detected and the system is “armed” to NOTE: • When the LaneSense system is on, the provide visual warnings in the instrument The LaneSense system operates with the LaneSense telltale is solid white when only cluster display and a torque warning in the similar behavior for a right lane departure. the left lane marking has been detected steering wheel if an unintentional lane de- and the system is ready to provide visual parture occurs. Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If warnings in the instrument cluster display • When the LaneSense system senses a lane Equipped if an unintentional lane departure occurs. drift situation, the left thick lane line and When the LaneSense system is on; the lane • When the LaneSense system senses the the left thin line turn solid white. The Lane- lines are gray when both of the lane bound- lane has been approached and is in a lane Sense telltale changes from solid green to aries have not been detected and the Lane- departure situation, the left thick lane line solid yellow. At this time torque is applied Sense telltale is solid white. flashes from white to gray, the left thin line to the steering wheel in the opposite direc- remains solid white and the LaneSense tion of the lane boundary. telltale changes from solid white to flashing For example: If approaching the left side of yellow. the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. 169 Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected provide visual warnings in the instrument NOTE: cluster display and a torque warning in the • When the LaneSense system is on, the The LaneSense system operates with the steering wheel if an unintentional lane de- LaneSense telltale is solid white when only similar behavior for a right lane departure. parture occurs. the left lane marking has been detected Changing LaneSense Status and the system is ready to provide visual • When the LaneSense system senses a lane warnings in the instrument cluster display drift situation, the left thick lane line and The LaneSense system has settings to adjust if an unintentional lane departure occurs. left thin line turn solid yellow. The Lane- the intensity of the torque warning and the • When the LaneSense system senses the Sense telltale changes from solid green to warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you lane has been approached and is in a lane solid yellow. At this time torque is applied can configure through the Uconnect system departure situation, the left thick lane line to the steering wheel in the opposite direc- screen. flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line tion of the lane boundary. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- remains solid yellow and the LaneSense For example: If approaching the left side of dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor- telltale changes from solid white to flashing the lane the steering wheel will turn to the yellow. mation.

STARTING AND OPERATING right. NOTE: NOTE: • When the LaneSense system senses the The LaneSense system operates with the lane has been approached and is in a lane • When enabled the system operates above similar behavior for a right lane departure departure situation, the left thick lane line 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph when only the right lane marking has been flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line (180 km/h). detected. remains solid yellow. The LaneSense tell- • Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn- Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected tale changes from solid yellow to flashing ings. yellow. At this time torque is applied to the • When the LaneSense system is on, the lane steering wheel in the opposite direction of • The system will not apply torque to the lines turn from gray to white to indicate that the lane boundary. steering wheel whenever a safety system both of the lane markings have been de- engages (anti-lock brakes, traction control tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid For example: If approaching the left side of system, electronic stability control, forward green when both lane markings have been the lane the steering wheel will turn to the collision warning, etc.). detected and the system is “armed” to right. 170 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor- on the image to illustrate the width of the CAMERA mation. vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE center line overlay indicates the center of the Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see (with camera delay turned off), the rear cam- vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a an on-screen image of the rear surroundings era mode is exited and the previous screen hitch/receiver. of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is appears again. When the vehicle is shifted put into REVERSE. The image will be dis- out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned Different colored zones indicate the distance played in the touchscreen display along with on), the camera image will continue to be to the rear of the vehicle. a caution note to “check entire surroundings” displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting across the top of the screen. After five sec- out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed WARNING! onds this note will disappear. The ParkView exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is camera is located on the rear of the vehicle shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is Drivers must be careful when backing up above the rear license plate. cycled to the OFF position, or the user even when using the ParkView Rear Back presses image defeat [X] to exit out from the Up Camera. Always check carefully behind Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera camera video display. your vehicle, and be sure to check for 1. Press the “Controls” button located on pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob- NOTE: the bottom of the Uconnect display. structions, or blind spots before backing • If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph up. You are responsible for the safety of 2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will your surroundings and must continue to turn the Rear View Camera system on. be displayed continuously until deactivated pay attention while backing up. Failure to NOTE: via the touchscreen button “X”, the vehicle do so can result in serious injury or death. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System. • The touchscreen button “X” to disable dis- play of the camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is not in REVERSE. 171 1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the CAUTION! rear edge of the Fuel Door. • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/ her shoulder when using ParkView.

STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Fuel Filler If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, Fuel Door 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel not cover the lens. 2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door tank is full. inside the pipe seals the system. 5. Wait ten seconds before removing the fuel REFUELING THE VEHICLE 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle. The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed pipe; the nozzle opens and holds the flap- 6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and per door while refueling. door. closes automatically upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle. The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it prevents the filling of an incorrect type of fuel. 172 Emergency Gas Can Refueling WARNING! Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A funnel is provided to open the flapper door • Never have any smoking materials lit in to allow emergency refueling with a gas can. or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. 1. Retrieve funnel from the rear cargo area. • Never add fuel when the engine is run- 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening ning. This is in violation of most state as the fuel nozzle. and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” 3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold to turn on. flapper door open. • A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a 4. Pour fuel into funnel opening. portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground Fuel Filler Funnel while filling.

5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area. NOTE: • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

173 TRAILER TOWING Trailer TowingWeights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Maximum GTW Maximum Tongue Wt. Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area (Gross Trailer Wt.) (See Note) 2.0L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg) 2.0L Automatic With Trailer FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 400 lbs (181 kg) Tow Package 2.4L Automatic With Or Without Trailer Tow Pack- FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg) age 3.2L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg) 3.2L Automatic With Trailer FWD or 4WD 39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq m) 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg) Tow Package Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight refer- enced on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

174 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) TowingThis Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 4X4 Models Towing Condi- Wheels OFF the Front-Wheel Drive 1-Speed Power 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit tion Ground (FWD) Models Transfer Unit See Instructions: • Before towing, see your authorized dealer for the Mopar flat tow wiring kit • It is recommended to charge the battery of the towed vehicle during Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED recreational towing • Transmission in PARK • Power transfer unit in NEUTRAL (N) • Tow in forward direction Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK OK NOTE: • You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings. • When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.

175 7. Release the parking brake. Recreational Towing— Front-Wheel Drive CAUTION! (FWD) Models 8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the and release the brake pedal. drivetrain will result. on the ground can cause severe transmis- CAUTION! sion and/or power transfer unit damage. Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive Damage from improper towing is not cov- models) is allowed ONLY if the front wheels • Towing with the front wheels on the ered under the New Vehicle Limited War- are OFF the ground. This may be accom- ground will cause severe transmission ranty. plished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If damage. Damage from improper towing using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: is not covered under the New Vehicle Recreational Towing— 4x4 Models With 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow ve- Limited Warranty. 2-Speed Power Transfer Unit hicle, following the dolly manufacturer's • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is The power transfer unit must be shifted into instructions. released, and remains released, while being towed. NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be

STARTING AND OPERATING 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. in PARK for recreational towing. The NEU- 3. Apply the parking brake. Place transmis- Recreational Towing— 4x4 Models With TRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the sion in PARK. Turn the engine OFF. 1-Speed Power Transfer Unit 4WD selector switch. Shifts into and out of NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selec- 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the Recreational towing is not allowed. These tor switch in any mode position. dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position instructions. in the power transfer unit. CAUTION! 5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start the engine. NOTE: • Failure to use the proper Mopar wiring This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or 6. Press and hold the brake pedal. kit to power the steering system during vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are recreational towing may damage the ve- OFF the ground. hicle’s steering system and/or other ve- hicle components.

176 CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION!

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Tow- • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is It is necessary to follow these steps to be ing with only one set of wheels on the released, and remains released, while certain that the power transfer unit is fully ground (front or rear) will cause severe being towed. in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational tow- transmission and/or power transfer unit • Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on ing to prevent damage to internal parts. damage. Tow with all four wheels either tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using face bar will be damaged. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on a vehicle trailer). level ground, and shift the transmission to • Tow only in a forward direction. Towing Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) PARK. this vehicle backwards can cause severe 2. Turn the engine OFF. damage to the power transfer unit. WARNING! • The transmission must be in PARK for 3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, recreational towing. You or others could be injured or killed if but do not start the engine. • Before recreational towing, perform the you leave the vehicle unattended with the 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. procedure outlined under “Shifting into power transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the position without first fully engaging the 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. power transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL parking brake. The NEUTRAL (N) position 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, (N). Otherwise, internal damage will re- disengages both the front and rear drive- push and hold the recessed NEUTRAL (N) sult. shafts from the powertrain and will allow button (located by the selector switch) for • Towing this vehicle in violation of the the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission four seconds. The light behind the N sym- above requirements can cause severe is in PARK. The parking brake should al- transmission and/or power transfer unit ways be applied when the driver is not in bol will blink, indicating shift in progress. damage. Damage from improper towing the vehicle. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) is not covered under the New Vehicle when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is Use the following procedure to shift the 4WD Limited Warranty. complete. system into NEUTRAL (N).

177 13. Apply the parking brake. TRAL (N) indicator light will flash continu- ously until all requirements are met or until 14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the NEUTRAL (N) button is released. the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode 15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle for a shift to take place and for the position using a suitable tow bar. indicator lights to be operable. If the igni- 16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift but do not start the engine. will not take place and no position indicator 17. Press and hold the brake pedal. lights will be on or flashing. 18. Release the parking brake. • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have 19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key not been met. fob, and release the brake pedal. Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) STARTING AND OPERATING Neutral Button NOTE: Use the following procedure to prepare your • When towing this vehicle behind another 7. After the shift is completed and the NEU- vehicle for normal usage. TRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEU- vehicle, the Mopar flat tow wiring kit must TRAL (N) button. be used, and the parking brake must be 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, released. leaving it connected to the tow vehicle. 8. Start the engine. • Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that 2. Apply the parking brake. 9. Release the parking brake. must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL 3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, 10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. (N) button, and must continue to be met but do not start the engine. 11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds until the shift has been completed. If any of 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. and ensure that there is no vehicle these requirements are not met before movement. pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. longer met during the shift, then the NEU- 12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 178 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, 8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been NOTE: push and hold the recessed power transfer released, the power transfer unit will shift • Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that unit NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the to the position indicated by the selector must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL selector switch) for one second. switch. (N) button, and must continue to be met NOTE: until the shift has been completed. If any of When shifting the power transfer unit out these requirements are not met before of NEUTRAL (N), the engine should re- pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no main OFF to avoid gear clash. longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously 9. Shift the transmission into PARK. until all requirements are met or until the 10. Release the brake pedal. NEUTRAL (N) button is released. 11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position 12. Start the engine. indicator lights to be operable. If the igni- 13. Press and hold the brake pedal. tion is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift 14. Release the parking brake. will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. 15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, re- Neutral Button lease the brake pedal, and check that • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator the vehicle operates normally. light indicates that shift requirements have 7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light not been met. turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) 16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, button. if desired.

179 HAZARD WARNING ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — WARNING! FLASHERS IF EQUIPPED ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- Control tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located full responsibility and assume all risks on the switch bank just above the climate related to the use of the features and controls. applications in this vehicle. Only use the Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warn- features and applications when it is safe to ing flasher. When the switch is activated, all do so. Failure to do so may result in an directional turn signals will flash on and off to accident involving serious injury or death. warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push NOTE: the switch a second time to turn off the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Hazard Warning flashers. • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in • The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled function if you are connected to an oper- able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. and it is creating a safety hazard for other Assist And SOS Mirror motorists. Other Uconnect services will only be oper- 1 — SOS Button able if your SiriusXM Guardian service is When you must leave the vehicle to seek 2 — ASSIST Button active and you are connected to an oper- assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a SOS button. NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers may discharge the battery. 180 ASSIST Call button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED WARNING! The ASSIST Button is used to automatically light on the Rearview Mirror. full responsibility and assume all risks connect you to any one of the following sup- related to the use of the features and port centers: 2. The LED light located between the AS- applications in this vehicle. Only use the SIST and SOS buttons on the Rearview • Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or features and applications when it is safe to Mirror will turn green once a connection to need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and do so. Failure to do so may result in an a SOS operator has been made. you’ll be connected to someone who can accident involving serious injury or death. help. Roadside Assistance will know what 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and NOTE: vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi- a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call tional fees may apply for roadside assistance. system may transmit the following impor- • Your vehicle may be transmitting data • SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In- tant vehicle information to a SOS operator: as authorized by the subscriber. vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian. • Indication that the occupant placed a • Once a connection is made between the SOS Call. • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS all other vehicle issues. • The vehicle brand. operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the • The last known GPS coordinates of the SOS Call vehicle. vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the SOS operator 1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS opens a voice connection with the vehi- Mirror. operator through the vehicle audio system cle’s SOS Call system, the operator to determine if additional help is needed. NOTE: should be able to speak with you or In case the SOS Call button is pushed in other vehicle occupants and hear error, there will be a ten second delay be- WARNING! sounds occurring in the vehicle. The fore the SOS Call system initiates a call to a ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call con- tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with to remain connected with the SOS op- nection, push the SOS call button on the your hands on the steering wheel. You have erator until the SOS operator termi- Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation nates the connection. 181 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, appropriate emergency responders and WARNING! any of the following may occur at the time the provide them with important vehicle infor- nal to initiate an emergency call. To malfunction is detected, and at the begin- mation and GPS coordinates. avoid interference that can cause the ning of each ignition cycle: SOS Call system to fail, never add after- • The Rearview Mirror light located between WARNING! market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continu- ously be illuminated red. • If anyone in the vehicle could be in your vehicle’s electrical system or danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF • The Device Screen will display the follow- dangerous road conditions or location), YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY ing message “Vehicle device requires ser- do not wait for voice contact from an POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD- vice. Please contact your dealer.” Emergency Services Agent. All occu- ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI- • An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Ve- pants should exit the vehicle immedi- DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, hicle device requires service. Please con- IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ately and move to a safe location. APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTH- tact your dealer.” • Never place anything on or near the vehi- ERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. cle’s operable network and GPS antennas. • Modifications to any part of the SOS Call WARNING! You could prevent operable network and system could cause the air bag system to GPS signal reception, which can prevent fail when you need it. You could be • Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could your vehicle from placing an emergency injured if the air bag system is not there mean you will not have SOS Call services. call. An operable network and GPS signal to help protect you. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, reception is required for the SOS Call have your authorized dealer service the SOS Call System Limitations system to function properly. SOS Call system immediately. • The SOS Call system is embedded into Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call • The Occupant Restraint Control module the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not system capabilities. turns on the air bag Warning Light on the add aftermarket electrical equipment to instrument panel if a malfunction in any the vehicle’s electrical system. This may SOS or other emergency line operators in part of the system is detected. If the Air prevent your vehicle from sending a sig- Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have system calls. 182 • LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network con- (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connec- WARNING! gestion. tion and a GPS signal is required for the your authorized dealer service the Occu- SOS Call system to function properly. • Weather. pant Restraint Control system immedi- General Information ately. • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Even if the SOS Call system is fully func- Rules. Operation is subject to the following tional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control WARNING! two conditions: (1) This device may not cause may prevent or stop the SOS Call system harmful interference, and (2) this device operation. These include, but are not limited ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- must accept any interference received, in- to, the following factors: tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with cluding interference that may cause unde- your hands on the steering wheel. You have sired operation. • Delayed accessories mode is active. full responsibility and assume all risks • The ignition is in the OFF position. related to the use of the features and NOTE: applications in this vehicle. Only use the Changes or modifications not expressly ap- • The vehicle’s electrical systems are not features and applications when it is safe to proved by the party responsible for compli- intact. do so. Failure to do so may result in an ance could void the user's authority to oper- • The SOS Call system software and/or hard- accident involving serious injury or death. ate the equipment. ware are damaged during a crash. NOTE: • The vehicle battery loses power or becomes CAUTION! disconnected during a vehicle crash. • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. To avoid damage to the mirror during • LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network cleaning, never spray any cleaning solu- and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals • Never place anything on or near the vehi- tion directly onto the mirror. Apply the are unavailable or obstructed. cle’s LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/ mirror clean. • Equipment malfunction at the SOS opera- data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal recep- tor facility. tion, which can prevent your vehicle from • Operator error by the SOS operator. placing an emergency call. An operable LTE 183 BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs

Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Cargo Lamp TL212–2 Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A Reading Lamp WL212–2

Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Front Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Front Fog Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Rear Tail/Stop Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Rear Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer) Back-Up Lamps W21W License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)

184 Replacing Exterior Bulbs FUSES WARNING! Back-up Lamp system blows, contact an authorized WARNING! 1. Open the liftgate. dealer. • When replacing a blown fuse, always use 2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver an appropriate replacement fuse with General Information at the top of the bulb access cover to pry the same amp rating as the original fuse. the lower trim panel from the liftgate. The fuses protect electrical systems against Never replace a fuse with another fuse of excessive current. 3. Once the access panel is loose, pull it higher amp rating. Never replace a back exposing the insulation. blown fuse with metal wires or any other When a device does not work, you must check material. Do not place a fuse inside a the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a 4. Move insulation towards center of vehicle circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Fail- break/melt. to expose the back of liftgate lamp. ure to use proper fuses may result in Also, please be aware that when using power 5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and serious personal injury, fire and/or prop- outlets for extended periods of time with the remove from lamp. erty damage. engine off may result in vehicle battery dis- 6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other charge. 7. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket. services are switched off and/or disen- Underhood Fuses 8. Move insulation back to original position. gaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact The Power Distribution Center is located in 9. Move insulation towards center of vehicle an authorized dealer. the engine compartment near the battery. to expose the back of liftgate lamp. • If a general protection fuse for safety This center contains cartridge fuses, mini- 10. Close the liftgate. systems (air bag system, braking sys- fuses and relays. A label that identifies each tem), power unit systems (engine sys- component is printed on the inside of the tem, transmission system) or steering cover.

185 Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description F06 – – Not Used F07 15 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Mod - PCM (Diesel) / Surge Solenoid Purge Valve (Gas) F08 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Injectors (Gas), ECM (Gas), PCM/Fuel Injectors (Diesel) F09 15 Amp Blue (Gas) – Coolant Pump (Gas) 10 Amp Red (Diesel) UREA Coolant Pump/PCM (Diesel) F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped F11 – – Not Used F12 10 Amp Red – Supply And Purging Pump (Diesel) F13 10 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Mod (VSM)/Powertrain Control Mod (PCM)/Engine Control Mod- ule (ECM) F14 10 Amp Red – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Power Take-Off Unit (PTU)/Electric Park Brake

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY (EPB)/RDM/Brake System Module (BSM) – If Equipped/Brake Pedal Switch/Back Up Lamp Switch (Diesel) F15 – – Not Used F16 20 Amp Yellow – Ing Coils / Additional Diesel Content F17 30 Amp Green – Brake Vacuum Pump (GAS GMET4/V6 Engines Only) F18 – – Not Used F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Compressor Clutch F21 – – Not Used F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan (PWM) Enable F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2 F24 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Wiper F25B 20 Amp Yellow – FT/RR Washer

186 Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description F26 – 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater (Diesel) F27 – – Not Used F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module (TCM/Shifter) F29 – – Not Used F30 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module (ECM)/(EPS)/Fuel Pump Relay Feed/(PCM) F31 – – Not Used F32 – – Not Used F33 – – Not Used F34 – – Not Used F35 – – Not Used F36 – – Not Used F37 – – Not Used F38 – 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plugs (Diesel) F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor F40 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light – If Equipped F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1 F42 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Module – If Equipped F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor F44 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) – If Equipped F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof Control Module - If Equipped F47 – – Not Used F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module

187 Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115V/220V A/C) F50 – 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate Module F51 – – Not Used F52 – 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module (BSM) - ECU And Valves F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3 F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors/Rearview Camera, Rear Heated Seat Switch F56 15 Amp Blue – Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL), Dual USB Port – RR Console F57 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lights - If Equipped F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module/VSM/TT Mod/ESCL IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) – If Equipped F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet – Center Console F61 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lights - If Equipped F62 20 Amp Yellow – Windshield De-Icer – If Equipped F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated/Ventilated Seats - If Equipped F64 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Heated Seats – If Equipped F65 10 Amp Red – In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/Driver Assist System Module (DASM)/Park Assist (PAM) F66 15 Amp Blue – HVAC (ECC)/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Gateway Module F67 – – Not Used F68 – – Not Used F69 10 Amp Red – Transfer Case Switch (TSBM)/Active Grill Shutter (AGS) – If Equipped With Gas Engine

188 Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) F71 – – Not Used F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors (Gas) / PM Sensor (Diesel) F73 – 20 Amp Blue NOX Sensor #1 & #2 / Trailer Tow Backup (NAFTA & Gas) F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster (EBL) F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter – If Equipped F76 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Differential Module (RDM) - If Equipped F77 10 Amp Red – Hands Free Module, Brake Pedal Switch F78 10 Amp Red – Diagnostic Port / Digital TV / TBM F79 10 Amp Red – Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Electric Park Brake (EPB) SW/CD Mod/Steering Control Mod (SCCM)/HVAC/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio F81 – – Customer Selectable Location For F91 Power Outlet Feed F82 5 Amp Tan – Cybersecurity Gateway Module F83 – 20 Amp Blue Engine Controller Module (Gas) 30 Amp Pink SCU Module (Diesel) F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left F85 15 Amp Blue – (CSWM) Heated Steering Wheel F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horns F87 – – Not Used F88 10 Amp Red – Seat Belt Reminder (SBR)/Smart Camera F89 10 Amp Red – Auto Headlamp Leveling (If Equipped) / Headlamp F90 – – Not Used

189 Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description F91 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Rear – If Equipped – Customer Selectable F92 – – Not Used F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right F95 10 Amp Red – Sunroof Module / Rain Sensor Module (LRSM) / Electrochromatic Mirror Module (ECMM) / Dual USB Port (Rear)/ Power Outlet Console Illumination / Digital TV F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag) F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag) F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier/ANC F99 – – Not Used F100 – – Not Used IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Circuit Breakers CB1 30 Amp * Power Seat (Driver) CB2 30 Amp * Power Seat (Pass) CB3 25 Amp Power Window

* 30A mini fuse is substituted for 25A Circuit Breaker.

190 Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is located on the Body Control Module (BCM) in the passenger com- partment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel. Cavity Blade Fuse Description F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad – If Equipped F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX) F89 10 Amp Red Door Locks – Driver Unlock F91 7.5 Amp Brown Left Front Fog Lamp (Low And High Line) F92 7.5 Amp Brown Right Front Fog Lamp (High Line) F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right

191 JACKING AND TIRE Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the CHANGING The jack, wheel chocks, and spare tire are jack with two attachment points. When stowed under the load floor behind the rear the jack is partially expanded, the tension WARNING! seat. between the two attachment points holds 1. Open the liftgate. the jack handle in place. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traf- 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor 7. Remove the spare tire. fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid handle. the danger of being hit when operating WARNING! 3. Remove the hook from the stowed posi- the jack or changing the wheel. tion on the back side of the load floor and • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dan- A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a place the hook over the top body flange gerous. The vehicle could slip off the collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack and fall on you. You could be and weather seal. This will hold the load IN CASE OF EMERGENCY jack parts and the spare tire in the places crushed. Never put any part of your body floor up while obtaining the jack and provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re- under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you spare tire. paired or replaced immediately. need to get under a raised vehicle, take 4. Remove the fastener securing the jack it to a service center where it can be and spare tire. raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the 5. Remove the chocks. vehicle is on a jack. 6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt • The jack is designed to be used as a tool wrench from the spare wheel as an assem- for changing tires only. The jack should bly. Turn the jack screw to the left to not be used to lift the vehicle for service loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove purposes. The vehicle should be jacked the wrench from the jack assembly. on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

192 Preparations For Jacking WARNING! 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as pos- far from the edge of the roadway as sible. Avoid icy or slippery areas. possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. WARNING! • Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side • Apply the parking brake firmly and set of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull the transmission in PARK. far enough off the road to avoid being hit • Never start or run the engine with the when operating the jack or changing the vehicle on a jack. wheel. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. it is on a jack. Wheel Chocks • Do not get under the vehicle when it is 3. Apply the parking brake. on a jack. If you need to get under a NOTE: 4. Place the gear selector into PARK. raised vehicle, take it to a service center Passengers should not remain in the vehicle where it can be raised on a lift. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. when the vehicle is being jacked. • Only use the jack in the positions indi- 6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel Jacking Instructions cated and for lifting this vehicle during a diagonally opposite of the jacking posi- tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be tion. For example, if changing the right WARNING! front tire, chock the left rear wheel. extremely careful of motor traffic. Carefully follow these tire changing warn- • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, ings to help prevent personal injury or are securely stowed, spares must be stowed damage to your vehicle: with the valve stem facing the ground.

193 2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle. 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Jacking Locations 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Warning Label that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack CAUTION! saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cut- Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by out in the sill cladding. jacking on locations other than those indi- cated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks, and wheel bolt wrench.

Rear Jack Location Engaged

194 7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly and thread the pin into the WARNING! wheel hub to assist in mounting the spare To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off tire. the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts 8. Mount the spare tire. fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in CAUTION! serious injury. 10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turn- Be sure to mount the spare tire with the ing the jack handle counterclockwise. valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is 11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push mounted incorrectly. down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. NOTE: Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern Front Jack Location Engaged • For vehicles so equipped, do not at- until each wheel bolt has been tightened 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove tempt to install a center cap or wheel twice. If in doubt about the correct tight- the flat tire. cover on the compact spare. ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a • Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And service station. WARNING! Maintenance” in the Owner's Manual for further information about the spare NOTE: Raising the vehicle higher than necessary tire, its use, and operation. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. 9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded “Technical Specifications” for the proper Raise the vehicle only enough to remove end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. lug bolt torque. the tire. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. 12. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat tire. 6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. 195 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push WARNING! TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF down on the wrench while at the end of EQUIPPED A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a the handle for increased leverage. Tighten collision or hard stop could endanger the the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. jack parts and the spare tire in the places doubt about the correct tightness, have Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re- them checked with a torque wrench by an not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit paired or replaced immediately. authorized dealer or service station. can be used in outside temperatures down to Refer to “Torque Specifications” in approximately -4°F (-20°C). Road Tire Installation “Technical Specifications” for the proper This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. lug bolt torque. allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the 5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 55 mph (90 km/h). threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. Tire Service Kit Storage spare tire area. Secure the assembly using WARNING! the means provided. Release the parking The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load brake before driving the vehicle. floor behind the rear seat. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off 6. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel 1. Open the liftgate. the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor fully until the vehicle has been lowered. that all wheel bolts are properly seated handle. Failure to follow this warning may result in against the wheel. serious injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

196 Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle following symbols to indicate the air or seal- (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expi- ant mode. ration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure opti- Selecting Air Mode mum operation of the system. Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this posi- NOTE: tion for air pump operation only. Use the Refer to section “(F) Sealant Bottle and Hose Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this Replacement” in “Sealing a Tire with Tire mode. Service Kit” in this section. Selecting Sealant Mode • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) Turn the Mode Select Knob (5) to this posi- are a one tire application use and need to tion to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and be replaced after each use. Always replace to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear these components immediately at your Tire Service Kit Components hose) (6) when selecting this mode. original equipment vehicle dealer. 1 — Sealant 5 — Mode Select Using The Power Button • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a Bottle Knob liquid form, clean water and a damp cloth 2 — Deflation 6 — Sealant Hose Push and release the Power Button (4) once will remove the material from the vehicle or Button (Clear) to turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and tire and wheel components. Once the seal- 3 — Pressure 7 — Air Pump release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off ant dries, it can easily be peeled off and Gauge Hose (Black) the Tire Service Kit. 4 — Power 8 — Power Plug properly discarded. Button (located on the Using The Deflation Button • For optimum performance, make sure the bottom side of the Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris Tire Service Kit) air pressure in the tire if it becomes over- before connecting the Tire Service Kit. inflated. 197 • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with WARNING! WARNING! two needles, located in the Accessory Stor- – If the puncture in the tire tread is sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, age Compartment (on the bottom of the air approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or or absorbed through the skin. It causes pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or larger. skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. similar inflatable items. However, use only – If the tire has any sidewall damage. Flush immediately with plenty of water if the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the – If the tire has any damage from there is any contact with eyes or skin. Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode driving with extremely low tire pres- Change clothing as soon as possible, if when inflating such items to avoid injecting sure. there is any contact with clothing. sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit – If the tire has any damage from • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution con- Sealant is only intended to seal punctures driving on a flat tire. tains latex. In case of an allergic reac- less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the – If the wheel has any damage. tion or rash, consult a physician imme- – If you are unsure of the condition of tread of your vehicle. diately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the tire or the wheel. reach of children. If swallowed, rinse • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open mouth immediately with plenty of water the hoses. flames or heat source. and drink plenty of water. Do not induce • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward vomiting! Consult a physician immedi- WARNING! in a collision or hard stop could endan- ately. ger the occupants of the vehicle. Always • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side stow the Tire Service Kit in the place Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far provided. Failure to follow these warn- enough off the road to avoid the danger ings can result in injuries that are seri- (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service of being hit when using the Tire Service ous or fatal to you, your passengers, and Kit: Kit. others around you. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the • Take care not to allow the contents of vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. vehicle under the following circum- Tire Service Kit to come in contact with stances: hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit

198 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 with the deflated tire) is in a position that then screw the fitting at the end of the – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): is near to the ground. This will allow the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant the valve stem and keep the Tire Service plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure Kit flat on the ground. This will provide outlet. the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the best positioning of the kit when inject- the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. NOTE: ing the sealant into the deflated tire and Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or running the air pump. Move the vehicle as the Sealant Mode position and not Air nails) from the tire. necessary to place the valve stem in this Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn position before proceeding. (C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into On the Tire Service Kit. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto The Deflated Tire: 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different transmission) or in Gear (manual trans- • Always start the engine before turning ON 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or mission) and place the ignition in the OFF the Tire Service Kit. another vehicle, if available. Make sure position. the engine is running before turning ON NOTE: the Tire Service Kit. 4. Apply the parking brake. Manual transmission vehicles must have the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due (B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: parking brake engaged and the gear selector to previous use. Call for assistance. in NEUTRAL. 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and NOTE: turn to the Sealant Mode position. • After pushing the Power Button (4), the If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Seal- 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then and the pump is operating, air will dispense ant Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the remove the cap from the fitting at the end and into the tire. Sealant Hose (6). of the hose. NOTE: 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the Sealant may leak out through the puncture in ground next to the deflated tire. the tire. 199 If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the NOTE: Sealant Hose (6): If the tire becomes overinflated, push the CAUTION! • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at 1. Continue to operate the pump until seal- Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result ant is no longer flowing through the hose to the recommended inflation pressure be- fore continuing. in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the and the vehicle’s interior. It can also re- sealant flows through the Sealant Hose If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure sult in sealant contacting internal Tire (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within Service Kit components which may cause high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure 15 minutes: permanent damage to the kit. Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from ap- 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the proximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual (D) Drive Vehicle: Tire Service Kit. tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) Immediately after injecting sealant and in- is empty. 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the flating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the 2. The pump will start to inject air into the sticker on the instrument panel. (8 km) or ten minutes to ensure distribution tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. (1) is empty. Continue to operate the 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h). pump and inflate the tire to the pressure (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap indicated on the tire pressure label on the on the fitting at the end of the hose, and WARNING! driver-side latch pillar (recommended place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle pressure). Check the tire pressure by look- storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire “Drive Vehicle.” ing at the Pressure Gauge (3). repair. Have the tire inspected and re- paired or replaced after using Tire Service If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi CAUTION! Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to • The metal end fitting from Power Plug follow this warning can result in injuries • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not (8) may get hot after use, so it should be that are serious or fatal to you, your pas- attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for handled carefully. sengers, and others around you. assistance. 200 (E) After Driving: NOTE: (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “When- 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in Deflation Button to reduce the tire pres- ever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before color). sure to the recommended inflation pres- continuing. sure before continuing. 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and button in the recessed area under the 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the turn to the Air Mode position. sealant bottle. valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet. 3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Re- 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper move the bottle and dispose of it 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in storage area in the vehicle. accordingly. color) and screw the fitting at the end of 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire hose (7) onto the valve stem. replaced at the earliest opportunity at an Service Kit housing. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading authorized dealer or tire service center. the Pressure Gauge (3). 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): instrument panel after the tire has been repaired. aligns with the hose slot in the front of the The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt housing. Push the bottle into the housing. 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Seal- to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis- An audible click will be heard indicating ant Hose (6) assembly at an authorized tance. the bottle is locked into place. dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “(F) If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”. 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire NOTE: and return the hose to its storage area Service Kit and inflate the tire to the When having the tire serviced, advise the (located on the bottom of the air pump). pressure indicated on the tire and loading authorized dealer or service center that the information label on the driver-side door tire has been sealed using the Tire Service 7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage opening. Kit. location in the vehicle. 201 JUMP STARTING Preparations For Jump Start WARNING! If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can The battery in your vehicle is located in the You can be injured by moving fan be jump started using a set of jumper cables front of the engine compartment, behind the blades. and a battery in another vehicle or by using a left headlight assembly. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, portable battery booster pack. Jump starting watch bands and bracelets that could can be dangerous if done improperly, so please make an inadvertent electrical contact. follow the procedures in this section carefully. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can NOTE: burn your skin or eyes and generate When using a portable battery booster pack, hydrogen gas which is flammable and follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc- explosive. Keep open flames or sparks tions and precautions. away from the battery. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING! 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto- matic transmission into PARK and turn Do not attempt jump starting if the battery the ignition to LOCK. is frozen. It could rupture or explode and 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec- cause personal injury. essary electrical accessories. Positive Battery Post CAUTION! 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the WARNING! Do not use a portable battery booster pack jumper cables reach, apply the parking or any other booster source with a system • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to fan whenever the hood is raised. It can the battery, starter motor, alternator or start anytime the ignition switch is ON. electrical system may occur.

202 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive 6. Once the engine is started, remove the WARNING! (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of jumper cables in the reverse sequence: the booster battery. Do not allow vehicles to touch each other Disconnecting The Jumper Cables as this could establish a ground connec- 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the tion and personal injury could result. cable to the negative (-) post of the jumper cable from the engine ground of booster battery. Jump Starting Procedure the vehicle with the discharged battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega- (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground WARNING! tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) (exposed metal part of the discharged post of the booster battery. Failure to follow this jump starting proce- vehicle’s engine) away from the battery dure could result in personal injury or and the fuel injection system. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the property damage due to battery explosion. jumper cable from the positive (+) post of WARNING! the booster battery. CAUTION! 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive Do not connect the jumper cable to the (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post Failure to follow these procedures could negative (-) post of the discharged battery. of the vehicle with the discharged battery. result in damage to the charging system of The resulting electrical spark could cause the booster vehicle or the discharged ve- the battery to explode and could result in If frequent jump starting is required to start hicle. personal injury. Only use the specific your vehicle, you should have the battery and ground point, do not use any other exposed charging system inspected at an authorized Connecting The Jumper Cables metal parts. dealer. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the cable to the positive (+) post of the dis- booster battery, let the engine idle for a CAUTION! charged vehicle. few minutes, and then start the engine in Accessories plugged into the vehicle the vehicle with the discharged battery. power outlets draw power from the vehi-

203 IF YOUR ENGINE NOTE: CAUTION! There are steps that you can take to slow cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., OVERHEATS down an impending overheat condition: cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if In any of the following situations, you can • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. plugged in long enough without engine reduce the potential for overheating your en- The A/C system adds heat to the engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis- gine by taking the appropriate action. cooling system and turning the A/C off can charge sufficiently to degrade battery life help remove this heat. and/or prevent the engine from starting. • On the highways — slow down. • You can also turn the temperature control • In city traffic — while stopped, place the to maximum heat, the mode control to floor REFUELING IN EMERGENCY transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not in- and the blower control to high. This allows crease engine idle speed. The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is the heater core to act as a supplement to located in the spare tire storage area. If your the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY vehicle is out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can CAUTION! is needed, insert the funnel into the filler Driving with a hot cooling system could neck and proceed to fill the vehicle. WARNING! damage your vehicle. If the temperature For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the You or others can be badly burned by hot System refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con- engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from “Starting And Operating”. ditioner turned off until the pointer drops your radiator. If you see or hear steam back into the normal range. If the pointer coming from under the hood, do not open remains on the “H” and you hear continu- the hood until the radiator has had time to ous chimes, turn the engine off immedi- cool. Never try to open a cooling system ately and call for service. pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

204 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or cannot be moved out of the PARK position, snow, it can often be moved using a rocking you can use the following procedure to tem- motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left porarily move the gear selector: to clear the area around the front wheels. 1. Turn the engine OFF. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift back and forth between 2. Apply the parking brake. DRIVE and REVERSE, while gently pressing 3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, care- the accelerator. fully separate the shifter bezel and boot NOTE: assembly from the center console, and Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can raise it up to access the gear selector only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph mechanism. (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission Override Access Hole 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the remains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec- brake pedal. 6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL onds, you must press the brake pedal to position. engage DRIVE or REVERSE. 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the gear selector override ac- 7. The vehicle may then be started in Use the least amount of accelerator pedal cess hole (at the right front corner of the NEUTRAL. pressure that will maintain the rocking mo- tion without spinning the wheels or racing the gear selector assembly), and push and 8. Reinstall the gear selector boot. hold the override release lever down. engine. WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel

205 WARNING! CAUTION! CAUTION! speeds may cause damage, or even failure, overheating and failure. It can also dam- • Racing the engine or spinning the of the axle and tires. A tire could explode age the tires. Do not spin the wheels wheels may lead to transmission over- and injure someone. Do not spin your ve- above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear heating and failure. Allow the engine to hicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (no transmission shifting occurring). idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds for at least one minute after every five continuously without stopping when you rocking-motion cycles. This will mini- are stuck and do not let anyone near a TOWING A DISABLED spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. mize overheating and reduce the risk of VEHICLE clutch or transmission failure during NOTE: prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. This section describes procedures for towing Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift- a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing ing between DRIVE and REVERSE, do service.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may If the transmission and drivetrain are oper- the vehicle. Once the vehicle has been freed, result. able, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore • Revving the engine or spinning the towed as described under “Recreational Tow- “ESC On” mode. Refer to “Electronic Brake wheels too fast may lead to transmission ing” in the “Starting And Operating” section. Control System” in “Safety” for further information.

206 4X4 MODELS Wheels OFF The 1–SPEED 2–SPEED Towing Condition FWD MODELS Ground POWER TRANSFER UNIT POWER TRANSFER UNIT See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED • Transmission in PARK • Power Transfer Unit in NEUTRAL • Tow in forward direction Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required NOTE: If you must use the accessories (wipers, de- to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only • You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition tow bars and other equipment designed for feature is disabled before towing this ve- must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC this purpose, following equipment manufac- hicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park mode. turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake Note that the Safehold feature will engage mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing feature is enabled or disabled via the cus- the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's device to main structural members of the tomer programmable features in the door is opened (if the ignition is ON, trans- vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack- Uconnect Settings. mission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles • Vehicles with a discharged battery or total released). If you are towing this vehicle with under tow must be observed. electrical failure when the Electric Park the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel manually disable the Electric Park Brake dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the each time the driver's door is opened, by ground when moving the vehicle onto a pressing the brake pedal and then releasing flatbed. the EPB. 207 If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s OFF of the ground (using a towing dolly, or battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector wheel lift equipment with the front wheels WARNING! Override” in this section for instructions on raised). • DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its shifting the transmission out of PARK so that Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is re- wheels on the ground. Damage to the the vehicle can be moved. leased, and remains released, while being drivetrain will result. • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used towed. The Electric Park Brake does not need (if the remaining wheels are on the CAUTION! to be released, if all four wheels are off the ground). Internal damage to the trans- ground. • Do not use sling type equipment when mission or power transfer unit will occur towing. Vehicle damage may occur. if a front or rear wheel lift is used when • When securing the vehicle to a flat bed CAUTION! towing. truck, do not attach to front or rear • Towing this vehicle in violation of the Towing this vehicle in violation of the suspension components. Damage to above requirements can cause severe IN CASE OF EMERGENCY your vehicle may result from improper above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from im- transmission and/or power transfer unit towing. proper towing is not covered under the damage. Damage from improper towing • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is New Vehicle Limited Warranty. is not covered under the New Vehicle released, and remains released, while Limited Warranty. being towed. 4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power Transfer 4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power Transfer Unit Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models Unit The manufacturer recommends towing your The manufacturer requires towing with all The manufacturer recommends towing with vehicle with all four wheels OFF of the ground four wheels OFF the ground. all four wheels OFF the ground. using a flatbed. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on If flatbed equipment is not available, this a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised vehicle must be towed with the front wheels and the opposite end on a towing dolly. and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

208 If flatbed equipment is not available and the Power Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with CAUTION! WARNING! a 2–speed Power Transfer Unit may be towed damage. Damage from improper towing aged strap, it has reduced strength. DO (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on is not covered under the New Vehicle NOT attempt to repair straps. ONLY per- the ground), under the following conditions: Limited Warranty. sons involved in the recovery should be in either vehicle. No passengers. Anyone in- • The Power Transfer Unit must be in NEU- Recovery Strap — If Equipped side the vehicles can be struck by strap TRAL (N). recoil, causing serious injury. MOVE by- Your vehicle may be included with a recovery • The transmission must be in PARK. standers at least 40 ft (12.2 m) from the strap. Recovery straps do not act like tradi- recovery area when using the recovery • Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is re- tional tow straps, chains, or winch cables. strap. leased, and remains released, while being towed. WARNING! Using Recovery Strap 1. Review all warnings and instructions first. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting Recovery straps should only be used in And Operating” for detailed instructions. emergencies to rescue stranded vehicles. 2. Position the recovery vehicle. Only use Recovery straps on vehicles that 3. Connect the recovery strap. CAUTION! fit within the recommended GVW of your recovery strap. Only attach recovery straps 4. Add a recovery damper or blanket. • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used to OE recommended anchor points or 5. Clear the danger zone. (if the remaining wheels are on the emergency towing anchor points. Never 6. Safely and slowly start pulling. ground). Internal damage to the trans- attach to tow ball or vehicle tie down point, mission or power transfer unit will occur these are not designed for this purpose. 7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both if a front or rear wheel lift is used when Never attach to vehicle steering, drive vehicles are secure and parked. towing. train, or any other suspension compo- • Towing this vehicle in violation of the nents. NEVER pull a strap over sharp above requirements can cause severe edges or abrasive surfaces that can dam- transmission and/or power transfer unit age the recovery strap. NEVER use a dam-

209 ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Accident Response System. Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in under- Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- standing how a vehicle’s systems performed tems” in “Safety” for further information on under certain crash or near crash-like situa- the Enhanced Accident Response System tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit- (EARS) function. ting a road obstacle. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- tems” in “Safety” for further information on

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

210 SCHEDULED SERVICING Your authorized dealer will reset the oil Severe Duty All Models change indicator message after completing Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is oil change indicator system. The oil change change is performed by someone other than operated in a dusty and off road environment or indicator system will remind you that it is your authorized dealer, the message can be is operated predominately at idle or only very time to take your vehicle in for scheduled reset by referring to the steps described un- low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is maintenance. der “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting considered Severe Duty. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Own- change indicator message will illuminate. This er’s Manual for further information. At Every Fuel Stop: means that service is required for your vehicle. NOTE: • Check engine oil level. Operating conditions such as frequent short- Under no circumstances should oil change • Check windshield washer fluid level. trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), • Check tire pressure and look for unusual temperatures will influence when the “Oil twelve months or 350 hours of engine run wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first Change Required” message is displayed. Se- time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours vere Operating Conditions can cause the sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs of engine run or idle time is generally only a before the oil indicator system turns on. change oil message to illuminate as early as concern for fleet customers. 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser- your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, voir and brake master cylinder, fill as within the next 500 miles (805 km). needed. • Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

211 Maintenance Plan At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Change Indicator System: Required Maintenance Intervals. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of • Inspect engine cooling system protection Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this sec- irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil and hoses tion for the required maintenance intervals. indicator system turns on • Inspect exhaust system At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil • Inspect battery and clean and tighten ter- • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty Change Indicator System: minals as required or off-road conditions • Change oil and filter • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if nec- X essary. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X

212 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Replace spark plugs — 2.0L Engine** X X Replace spark plugs — 2.4L & 3.2L Engine** X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles XX (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mile- age based only, yearly intervals do not WARNING! apply. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component WARNING! malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an • You can be badly injured working on or accident. around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a com- petent mechanic.

213 Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environ- ment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

214 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2.0L Engine

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Battery 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

215 2.4L Engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Battery 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick

216 3.2L Engine

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery 2 — Oil Filter Access Cover 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick 4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Engine Oil Fill 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

217 Checking Oil Level CAUTION! WARNING! To assure proper engine lubrication, the en- Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase Commercially available windshield washer gine oil must be maintained at the correct will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. solvents are flammable. They could ignite level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, This could damage your engine. and burn you. Care must be exercised such as every fuel stop. The best time to when filling or working around the washer check the engine oil level is about five min- Adding Washer Fluid solution. utes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off. The windshield and rear window washers Maintenance-Free Battery share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid res- Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ervoir is located in the front of the engine Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance- ground will improve the accuracy of the oil compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level free battery. You will never have to add water, level readings. in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the nor is periodic maintenance required. There are three possible dipstick types, reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not • Crosshatched zone. radiator antifreeze) and operate the system WARNING! for a few seconds to flush out the residual • Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. water. • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the and can burn or even blind you. Do not When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take low end of the range and MAX at the high allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or end of the range. skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this battery when attaching clamps. If acid NOTE: will help blade performance. splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the Always maintain the oil level within the cross- To prevent freeze-up of your windshield area immediately with large amounts of hatch markings on the dipstick. washer system in cold weather, select a solu- water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce- Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for reading is at the low end of the dipstick range temperature range of your climate. This rat- further information. will raise the oil level to the high end of the ing information can be found on most washer range marking. fluid containers. 218 WARNING! CAUTION! WARNING! • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. the charger to the battery. Do not use a doubt about your ability to perform a ser- Keep flame or sparks away from the “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. vice job, take your vehicle to a competent battery. Do not use a booster battery or mechanic. any other booster source with an output DEALER SERVICE greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. An authorized dealer has the qualified service Engine Oil Filter • Battery posts, terminals, and related ac- personnel, special tools, and equipment to The engine oil filter should be replaced with a cessories contain lead and lead com- perform all service operations in an expert new filter at every engine oil change. pounds. Wash hands after handling. manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your Engine Oil Filter Selection CAUTION! vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be- This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow fore attempting any procedure yourself. type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this • It is essential when replacing the cables type for replacement. The quality of replace- on the battery that the positive cable is NOTE: attached to the positive post and the Intentional tampering with emissions control ment filters varies considerably. Only high negative cable is attached to the nega- systems may void your warranty and could quality filters should be used to assure most tive post. Battery posts are marked posi- result in civil penalties being assessed efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi- against you. high quality oil filters and are recommended. fied on the battery case. Cable clamps Engine Air Cleaner Filter should be tight on the terminal posts WARNING! and free of corrosion. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this sec- • If a “fast charger” is used while the bat- You can be badly injured working on or tion for the proper maintenance intervals. tery is in the vehicle, disconnect both around a motor vehicle. Only do service vehicle battery cables before connecting work for which you have the knowledge NOTE: and the proper equipment. If you have any Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Condi- tions” maintenance interval if applicable. 219 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal WARNING! Air Conditioner Maintenance 1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner For best possible performance, your air con- The air induction system (air cleaner, cover. ditioner should be checked and serviced by hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of pro- an authorized dealer at the start of each warm tection in the case of engine backfire. Do 2. If equipped with a 2.0L remove the season. This service should include cleaning not remove the air induction system (air screws from the air cleaner cover and cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal disconnect the electrical sensor. of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at is necessary for repair or maintenance. 3. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air this time. Make sure that no one is near the engine cleaner filter. compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, 4. Remove the air cleaner filter element from WARNING! hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can the housing assembly. result in serious personal injury. • Use only refrigerants and compressor Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation lubricants approved by the manufac- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection NOTE: turer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam- The quality of replacement engine air cleaner Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter ele- mable and can explode, injuring you.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE filters varies considerably. Only high quality Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri- ment. filters should be used to assure most efficient cants can cause the system to fail, re- service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a 1. Install the air cleaner filter element into quiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty high quality filter and are recommended. the housing assembly with the air cleaner Information Book, located in your own- Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and filter inspection surface facing downward. er’s information kit, for further warranty information. Replacement 2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the hous- • The air conditioning system contains re- ing assembly locating tabs. Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or frigerant under high pressure. To avoid debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or 3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner risk of personal injury or damage to the debris you should change your air cleaner cover to the housing assembly and recon- system, adding refrigerant or any repair filter. nect the electrical connector (if equipped). 220 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling The A/C air filter is located in front of the WARNING! R-1234yf — If Equipped evaporator on the lower right of center con- requiring lines to be disconnected should sole. Perform the following procedure to re- R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a be done by an experienced technician. place the filter: hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is 1. Remove the passenger side console close- CAUTION! an ozone-friendly substance with a low out cover. Do not use chemical flushes in your air global-warming potential. The manufacturer 2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward conditioning system as the chemicals can recommends that air conditioning service be to disengage the front retaining tab and damage your air conditioning components. performed by an authorized dealer using re- remove the cover. Such damage is not covered by the New covery and recycling equipment. Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. — If Equipped Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Filter) hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone- friendly substance. The manufacturer recom- Do not remove the cabin air filter while the mends that air conditioning service be per- vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in formed by an authorized dealer or other the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air service facilities using recovery and recycling filter removed and the blower operating, the equipment. blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in per- NOTE: sonal injury. Console Closeout Panel Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. 3. Pull down the passenger hush panel un- der the dash panel 221 Hush Panel Air Filter Cover Location A/C Air Filter

4. Remove the filter door by pushing down 5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it 6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the tab on the top of the door to release straight out of the housing. Take note of position indicators pointing in the same the cover then rotate the door out and lift the air filter position indicators. direction as removal. up. CAUTION!

The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.

222 7. Install the passenger side hush panel un- present with chattering, marks, water lines or 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade der the dash panel and console closeout. wet spots. If any of these conditions are off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in present, clean the wiper blades or replace as the full up position. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the necessary. proper maintenance intervals. The wiper blades and wiper arms should be Windshield Wiper Blades inspected periodically, not just when wiper Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades performance problems are experienced. This and the windshield periodically with a sponge inspection should include the following or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. points: This will remove accumulations of salt or road • Wear or uneven edges film. • Foreign material Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long • Hardening or cracking periods may cause deterioration of the wiper • Deformation or fatigue blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, windshield. replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost arm or blade that is damaged. or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade 1 — Wiper Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation rubber out of contact with petroleum prod- 2 — Release Tab ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. 3 — Wiper Arm CAUTION! NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de- Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back pending on geographical area and frequency against the glass without the wiper blade of use. Poor performance of blades may be in place or the glass may be damaged.

223 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding Installing The Front Wipers wiper blade and while holding the wiper the wiper arm with one hand and separating arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until down towards the base of the wiper arm. other hand (move the wiper blade toward the the wiper arm is in the full up position. right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on blade from the wiper arm). the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield. 3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will Wiper Blade With Release Tab In be accompanied by an audible click. Unlocked Position 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the 1 — Wiper Blade Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm glass. 2 — Release Tab 1 — Wiper Blade Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 3 — Wiper Arm 2 — Wiper Arm 3 — Release Tab 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. 224 NOTE: 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised receptacle on the end of the wiper arm. off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot NOTE: cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully Resistance will be accompanied by an raise the rear wiper arm without unsnap- audible snap. ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. 4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage.

Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 — Wiper Arm 3 — Wiper Blade

3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper Wiper Arm arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper 1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap blade nearest to wiper arm with your right Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 2 — Wiper Arm hand. With your left hand hold the wiper 3 — Wiper Blade arm as you pull the wiper blade away from 1 — Wiper Arm the wiper arm past its stop far enough to 2 — Wiper Blade

225 5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto Cooling System Engine Coolant Checks the glass. Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec- Installing The Rear Wiper WARNING! tion every 12 months (before the onset of 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away • You or others can be badly burned by hot freezing weather, where applicable). If the from the glass to allow the rear wiper engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the sys- blade to be raised off of the glass. from your radiator. If you see or hear tem should be drained, flushed, and refilled steam coming from under the hood, do with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to NOTE: not open the hood until the radiator has MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised had time to cool. Never open a cooling the front of the A/C condenser for any accu- off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot system pressure cap when the radiator mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully or coolant bottle is hot. by gently spraying water from a garden hose raise the rear wiper arm without unsnap- • Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry vertically down the face of the condenser. ping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage away from the radiator cooling fan when Check the engine cooling system hoses for the vehicle. the hood is raised. The fan starts auto- matically and may start at any time, brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. whether the engine is running or not. tightness of the connection at the coolant SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the • When working near the radiator cooling recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the en- opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or tire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE the bottom end of the wiper arm with one turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE hand, and apply pressure on the wiper fan is temperature controlled and can COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. blade flush with the wiper arm until it start at any time the ignition is in the ON snaps into place. mode. 4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.

226 Automatic Transmission RAISING THE VEHICLE Tire Markings Fluid Level Check In the case where it is necessary to raise the The fluid level is preset at the factory and vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service does not require adjustment under normal station. operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the trans- TIRES mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer Tire Safety Information can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leak- Tire safety information will cover aspects of age or transmission malfunction, visit an au- the following information: Tire Markings, Tire thorized dealer immediately to have the Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Tire Markings transmission fluid level checked. Operating Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum the vehicle with an improper fluid level can Safety Stan- Load cause severe transmission damage. dards Code 5 — Maximum (TIN) Pressure CAUTION! 2 — Size Desig- 6 — Treadwear, If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an nation Traction and authorized dealer immediately. Severe 3 — Service Temperature transmission damage may occur. An au- Description Grades thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

227 NOTE: • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based based on U.S. design standards. The size design standards and it begins with the tire on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires designation for LT-Metric tires is the same diameter molded into the sidewall. Ex- have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall as for P-Metric tires except for the letters ample: 31x10.5 R15 LT. preceding the size designation. Example: “LT” that are molded into the sidewall P215/65R15 95H. preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed • Temporary spare tires are designed for tem- to this standard have the tire size molded porary emergency use only. Temporary high into the sidewall beginning with the section pressure compact spare tires have the letter width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preced- size designation. Example: 215/ ing the size designation. Example: T145/ 65R15 96H. 80D18 103M. Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) • Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

228 EXAMPLE: R = Construction code • "R" means radial construction, or • "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index • A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol • A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions • The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

229 Tire Identification Number (TIN) located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black The TIN may be found on one or both sides of sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the tire; however, the date code may only be the TIN is not found on the outboard side, on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will then you will find it on the inboard side of the have the full TIN, including the date code, tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation • This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 03 means the 3rd week

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 01 means the year 2001 • Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

230 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pres- sure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

231 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the: NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is 1. Number of people that can be carried in listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear the vehicle. edge of the driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. including the spare tire (if equipped), at least 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, monthly and inflate to the recommended rear, and spare tires. pressure for your vehicle. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to Tire And Loading Information Placard the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of your Owner’s Manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Tire And Loading Information Placard gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the Example Tire Placard Location (Door) front and rear axles must not be exceeded.

232 To determine the maximum loading condi- (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit tions of your vehicle, locate the statement available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg “The combined weight of occupants and load capacity. For example, if “XXX” and there will be five 68 kg passengers in cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there your vehicle, the amount of available cargo on the Tire and Loading Information placard. and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635- The combined weight of occupants, cargo/ will be five 150 lb passengers in your 340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli- vehicle, the amount of available cargo cable) should never exceed the weight refer- and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE: enced here. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight of from your trailer will be transferred to your Limit— luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. The following table shows ex- amples on how to calculate total load, (1) Locate the statement “The com- vehicle. That weight may not safely cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of bined weight of occupants and cargo exceed the available cargo and lug- your vehicle with varying seating configura- should never exceed XXX kg or gage load capacity calculated in tions and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. Step 4. and may not be accurate for the seating and (2) Determine the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a load carry capacity of your vehicle. the driver and passengers that will be trailer, load from your trailer will be • For the following example, the combined riding in your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Consult weight of occupants and cargo should never this manual to determine how this exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). (3) Subtract the combined weight of reduces the available cargo and lug- the driver and passengers from XXX kg gage load capacity of your vehicle. or XXX lbs.

233 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 234 Safety Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect WARNING! the stability of the vehicle and can produce a Overloading of your tires is dangerous. WARNING! feeling of sluggish response or over respon- Overloading can cause tire failure, affect siveness in the steering. • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous vehicle handling, and increase your stop- NOTE: ping distance. Use tires of the recom- and can cause collisions. mended load capacity for your vehicle. • Underinflation increases tire flexing and • Unequal tire pressures from side to side Never overload them. can result in overheating and tire failure. may cause erratic and unpredictable steer- • Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to ing response. Tires — General Information cushion shock. Objects on the road and • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may chuckholes can cause damage that re- cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Tire Pressure sult in tire failure. • Overinflated or underinflated tires can Fuel Economy Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to affect vehicle handling and can fail sud- the safe and satisfactory operation of your Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by resistance resulting in higher fuel consump- • Unequal tire pressures can cause steer- improper tire pressure: tion. ing problems. You could lose control of • Safety and Vehicle Stability your vehicle. Tread Wear • Economy • Unequal tire pressures from one side of Improper cold tire inflation pressures can the vehicle to the other can cause the • Tread Wear cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced vehicle to drift to the right or left. tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire • Ride Comfort • Always drive with each tire inflated to replacement. the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

235 Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Inflation pressures specified on the placard Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort- tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire reduce this normal pressure build up or your able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring pressure after the vehicle has not been driven tire pressure will be too low. and uncomfortable ride. for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Tire Inflation Pressures 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure The manufacturer advocates driving at safe The proper cold tire inflation pressure is must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- speeds and within posted speed limits. Where listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge sure molded into the tire sidewall. speed limits or conditions are such that the of the driver's side door. vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain- Check tire pressures more often if subject to At least once a month: ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor- a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve- • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good pressures vary with temperature changes. hicle loading may be required for high-speed quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire make a visual judgement when determining Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for proper inflation. Tires may look properly (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature recommended safe operating speeds, loading inflated even when they are under-inflated. change. Keep this in mind when checking

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the and cold tire inflation pressures. • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible Winter. damage. WARNING! Example: If garage temperature = 68°F CAUTION! (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F High speed driving with your vehicle under (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure maximum load is dangerous. The added After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which strain on your tires could cause them to sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for fail. You could have a serious collision. Do This will prevent moisture and dirt from this outside temperature condition. not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum entering the valve stem, which could dam- capacity at continuous speeds above age the valve stem. 75 mph (120 km/h).

236 Radial Ply Tires Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that Tire Spinning have experienced a loss of pressure should be When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con- WARNING! replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels Combining radial ply tires with other types (Load Index and Speed Symbol). above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than of tires on your vehicle will cause your 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped vehicle to handle poorly. The instability Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In could cause a collision. Always use radial Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive Case Of Emergency” for further information. ply tires in sets of four. Never combine 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after them with other types of tires. a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid WARNING! loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat Tire Repair mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. If your tire becomes damaged, it may be inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi Forces generated by excessive wheel repaired if it meets the following criteria: (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A run flat mode it has limited driving capabili- tire could explode and injure someone. Do • The tire has not been driven on when flat. ties and needs to be replaced immediately. A not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than • The damage is only on the tread section of Run Flat tire is not repairable. 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 sec- your tire (sidewall damage is not repair- onds continuously when you are stuck, and It is not recommended driving a vehicle able). do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while no matter what the speed. • The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan a tire is in the run flat mode. inch (6 mm). See the tire pressure monitoring section for Tread Wear Indicators Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re- more information. Tread wear indicators are in the original pairs and additional information. equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

237 • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation Replacement Tires pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These ab- The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal- normal wear patterns will reduce tread life, ance of many characteristics. They should be resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- inspected regularly for wear and correct cold ment. tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires • Distance driven. Tire Tread equivalent to the originals in size, quality and • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating performance when replacement is needed. 1 — Worn Tire of V or higher, and Summer tires typically Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi- 2 — New Tire have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte- Loading Information placard or the Vehicle nance is highly recommended. These indicators are molded into the bottom Certification Label for the size designation of of the tread grooves. They will appear as WARNING! your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol bands when the tread depth becomes a for your tire will be found on the original 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is Tires and the spare tire should be replaced equipment tire sidewall. worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire after six years, regardless of the remaining SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in should be replaced. tread. Failure to follow this warning can the “Tire Safety Information” section of this result in sudden tire failure. You could lose Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section control and have a collision resulting in manual for more information relating to the for further information. serious injury or death. Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just with as little exposure to light as possible. The service life of a tire is dependent upon one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, varying factors including, but not limited to: handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make and gasoline. • Driving style. sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. 238 It is recommended you contact an authorized Summer Or Three Season Tires — If tire dealer or original equipment dealer with WARNING! Equipped any questions you may have on tire specifica- sult in tire overloading and failure. You Summer tires provide traction in both wet tions or capability. Failure to use equivalent could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires and dry conditions, and are not intended to replacement tires may adversely affect the be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of equipped with Summer tires, be aware these vehicle control. tires are not designed for Winter or cold WARNING! driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, CAUTION! than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with or speed rating other than that specified ice or snow. For more information, contact an for your vehicle. Some combinations of Replacing original tires with tires of a authorized dealer. unapproved tires and wheels may different size may result in false speedom- change suspension dimensions and per- eter and odometer readings. Summer tires do not contain the all season formance characteristics, resulting in designation or mountain/snowflake symbol changes to steering, handling, and brak- Tire Types on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in ing of your vehicle. This can cause un- sets of four; failure to do so may adversely All Season Tires — If Equipped predictable handling and stress to steer- affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. ing and suspension components. You All Season tires provide traction for all sea- could lose control and have a collision sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). WARNING! resulting in serious injury or death. Use Traction levels may vary between different all Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con- only the tire and wheel sizes with load season tires. All season tires can be identified ditions. You could lose vehicle control, ratings approved for your vehicle. by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on resulting in severe injury or death. Driving • Never use a tire with a smaller load index the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in or capacity, other than what was origi- too fast for conditions also creates the sets of four; failure to do so may adversely nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a possibility of loss of vehicle control. affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. tire with a smaller load index could re-

239 Snow Tires While studded tires improve performance on found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry This spare tire may be used in the tire rota- Some areas of the country require the use of surfaces may be poorer than that of non- tion for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can studded tires. Some states prohibit studded option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” tires; therefore, local laws should be checked the recommended tire rotation pattern. symbol on the tire sidewall. before using these tire types. If you need snow tires, Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Spare Tires — If Equipped select tires equivalent The compact spare is for temporary emer- in size and type to the NOTE: gency use only. You can identify if your ve- original equipment For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit hicle is equipped with a compact spare by tires. Use snow tires instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire looking at the spare tire description on the only in sets of four; Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in Tire and Loading Information Placard located failure to do so may the Owner’s Manual for further information. on the driver’s side door opening or on the adversely affect the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de- safety and handling of your vehicle. CAUTION! scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings preceding the size designation. Example:

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE than what was originally equipped with your Because of the reduced ground clearance, T145/80D18 103M. do not take your vehicle through an auto- vehicle and should not be operated at sus- matic car wash with a compact or limited T,S=Temporary Spare Tire tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For use temporary spare installed. Damage to Since this tire has limited tread life, the speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to the vehicle may result. original equipment or an authorized tire original equipment tire should be repaired (or dealer for recommended safe operating Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres- And Wheel — If Equipped the first opportunity. sures. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to tire and wheel equivalent in look and func- mount a conventional tire on the compact tion to the original equipment tire and wheel spare wheel, since the wheel is designed 240 specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not the original equipment tire and reinstall on install more than one compact spare tire and the vehicle at the first opportunity. WARNING! wheel on the vehicle at any given time. rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace Limited Use Spare — If Equipped (or repair) the original equipment tire at WARNING! The limited use spare tire is for temporary the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss emergency use only. This tire is identified by of vehicle control. Compact and collapsible spares are for tem- a label located on the limited use spare porary emergency use only. With these wheel. This label contains the driving limita- spares, do not drive more than 50 mph Wheel And Wheel TrimCare tions for this spare. This tire may look like the (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim- original equipped tire on the front or rear axle All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi- ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the num and chrome plated wheels, should be tread wear indicators, the temporary use of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to this limited use spare tire affects vehicle follow the warnings, which apply to your handling. Since it is not the same as your and water to maintain their luster and to pre- spare. Failure to do so could result in spare original equipment tire, replace (or repair) vent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same tire failure and loss of vehicle control. the original equipment tire and reinstall on soap solution recommended for the body of the the vehicle at the first opportunity. vehicle and remember to always wash when the Full Size Spare — If Equipped surfaces are not hot to the touch. WARNING! The full size spare is for temporary emer- Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium gency use only. This tire may look like the Limited use spares are for emergency use chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other originally equipped tire on the front or rear only. Installation of this limited use spare road chemicals used to melt ice or control axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge tire may have limited tread life. When the do not drive more than the speed listed on and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can temporary use full size spare tire needs to be to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard damage the wheel’s protective coating that replaced. Since it is not the same as your located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the helps keep them from corroding and original equipment tire, replace (or repair) tarnishing. 241 CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes wheel's protective finish. Such damage is by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline not covered by the New Vehicle Limited HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar- Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used ket wheel cleaners and automatic car Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom- on a regular basis; this is all that is re- washes may damage the wheel's protective mended. quired to maintain this finish. finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car NOTE: wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or If you intend parking or storing your vehicle Tire Chains (Traction Devices) for an extended period after cleaning the equivalent is recommended. Use of traction devices require sufficient tire- wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle to-body clearance. Follow these recommen- When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ- and apply the brakes to remove the water dations to guard against damage. ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken droplets from the brake components. This in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning activity will remove the red rust on the brake • Traction device must be of proper size for chemicals and equipment to prevent damage rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when the tire, as recommended by the traction to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or braking. device manufacturer SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low • Use on Front Tires Only recommended or select a non-abrasive, non- Gloss Clear Coat Wheels • Due to limited clearance, the following acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome traction devices are recommended: wheels. CAUTION! Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models If your vehicle is equipped with these CAUTION! • Original equipment 225/60R17 and 225/ specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel 55R18 tire sizes are not chainable. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com- bristle brush, metal polishes or oven pounds. They will permanently damage • Snow chains is permitted with the use of cleaner. These products may damage the this finish and such damage is not covered 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x 7.0 ET41 wheels. 242 • Use reduced size snow chains with a maxi- • Snow chains is permitted with the use of mum projection of 7 mm beyond the tire 225/65R17 tires on size 17 x CAUTION! profile. 7.5 ET31 wheels. • Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models may result if tire • Use reduced size snow chains with a maxi- Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models chains or traction devices are used with mum projection of 9 mm beyond the tire without a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit original equipment size tires. profile. • Original equipment 225/65R17 and 225/ To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, 60R18 tire sizes are not chainable. observe the following precautions: WARNING! • Because of restricted traction device • Snow chains is permitted with the use of clearance between tires and other sus- Using tires of different size and type (M+S, 215/60R17 tires on size 17 x pension components, it is important that Snow) between front and rear axles can 7.0 ET41 wheels. only traction devices in good condition cause unpredictable handling. You could are used. Broken devices can cause se- • Use reduced size snow chains with a maxi- lose control and have a collision. mum projection of 9 mm beyond the tire rious damage. Stop the vehicle immedi- profile. ately if noise occurs that could indicate CAUTION! device breakage. Remove the damaged Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Non-Trailhawk Models parts of the device before further use. with a Two-Speed Power Takeoff Unit • Use on Front Tires Only • Install device as tightly as possible and • Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD) • Snow chains is permitted with 225/ then retighten after driving about ½ mile Models may result if tire chains or trac- 65R17 and 225/60R18 tires. (0.8 km). tion devices are used with original • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Use reduced size snow chains with a maxi- equipment size tires. • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns mum projection of 7 mm beyond the tire • Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) and large bumps, especially with a profile. Models without a Two-Speed Power loaded vehicle. Takeoff Unit may result if tire chains or Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trailhawk Models • Do not drive for a prolonged period on traction devices are used with original dry pavement. • Original equipment 245/65R17 and P245/ equipment size tires. 65R17 sizes are not chainable. 243 Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the CAUTION! proper maintenance intervals. The reasons • Observe the traction device manufactur- for any rapid or unusual wear should be er’s instructions on the method of instal- corrected prior to rotation being performed. lation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested oper- The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rota- ating speed of the device manufacturer’s tion method is the “forward cross” shown in if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). the following diagram. This rotation pattern Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation • Do not use traction devices on a com- does not apply to some directional tires that pact spare tire. must not be reversed. CAUTION! Tire Rotation Recommendations Proper operation of four-wheel drive ve- hicles depends on tires of equal size, type The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle and circumference on each wheel. Any operate at different loads and perform differ- difference in tire size can cause damage to ent steering, handling, and braking func- the power transfer unit. Tire rotation tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal schedule should be followed to balance

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE rates. Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation tire wear.

These effects can be reduced by timely rota- The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are rotation method is the “rearward cross” especially worthwhile with aggressive tread shown in the following diagram. designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

244 DEPARTMENT OF Treadwear Traction Grades TRANSPORTATION The Treadwear grade is a comparative The Traction grades, from highest to UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY rating, based on the wear rate of the lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These GRADES tire when tested under controlled con- grades represent the tire's ability to ditions on a specified government test stop on wet pavement, as measured The following tire grading categories course. For example, a tire graded under controlled conditions on speci- were established by the National High- 150 would wear one and one-half fied government test surfaces of as- way Traffic Safety Administration. The times as well on the government phalt and concrete. A tire marked C specific grade rating assigned by the course as a tire graded 100. The rela- may have poor traction performance. tire's manufacturer in each category is tive performance of tires depends shown on the sidewall of the tires on upon the actual conditions of their WARNING! your vehicle. use, however, and may depart signifi- The traction grade assigned to this All passenger vehicle tires must con- cantly from the norm due to variations tire is based on straight-ahead brak- form to Federal safety requirements in in driving habits, service practices, ing traction tests, and does not in- addition to these grades. and differences in road characteristics clude acceleration, cornering, hy- and climate. droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

245 Temperature Grades • If you do not disconnect the battery from WARNING! the electrical system, check the battery The Temperature grades are A (the The temperature grade for this tire charge every 30 days. highest), B, and C, representing the is established for a tire that is prop- • Clean and protect the painted parts by tire's resistance to the generation of erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex- applying protective waxes. heat and its ability to dissipate heat, cessive speed, under-inflation, or • Clean and protect polished metal parts by when tested under controlled condi- excessive loading, either separately applying protective waxes. tions on a specified indoor laboratory or in combination, can cause heat • Apply talcum powder to the front and rear test wheel. buildup and possible tire failure. wiper blades and leave raised from the Sustained high temperature can cause glass. the material of the tire to degenerate STORING THE VEHICLE • Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care not to damage the painted sur- and reduce tire life, and excessive If the vehicle should remain stationary for temperature can lead to sudden tire face by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do more than a month, observe the following not use plastic sheeting which will not failure. The grade C corresponds to a precautions: allow the evaporation of moisture present SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE level of performance, which all pas- • Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and on the surface of the vehicle. senger vehicle tires must meet under possibly airy location the windows open • Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- slightly. (+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre- • Check that the Electric Park Brake is not the tire placard and check it periodically. sent higher levels of performance on engaged. • Do not drain the engine cooling system. the laboratory test wheel, than the • Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from • Whenever you leave the vehicle is station- minimum required by law. the battery post and be sure that the battery ary for two weeks or more, run idle the is fully charged. During storage check bat- engine for approximately five minutes, with tery charge quarterly. the air conditioning system on and high fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication 246 of the system, thus minimizing the possi- BODYWORK bility of damage to the compressor when CAUTION! the vehicle is put back into operation. Preserving The Bodywork powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. NOTE: Washing • Use of power washers exceeding When the vehicle has not been started or • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car damage or removal of paint and decals. Start Procedure is required to start the ve- Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse hicle. Special Care the panels completely with clear water. • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you Refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- And Operating” for further information. accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar riage at least once a month. Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to re- CAUTION! move. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and Before removal of the positive and nega- • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as trunk be kept clear and open. tive terminals to the battery, wait at least a Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, minute with ignition switch in the OFF stains and to protect your paint finish. Take • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in position and close the driver’s door. When care never to scratch the paint. the paint, touch them up immediately. The reconnecting the positive and negative ter- cost of such repairs is considered the re- • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power minals to the battery be sure the ignition sponsibility of the owner. switch is in the OFF position and the buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin driver’s door is closed. out the paint finish. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and CAUTION! protective coating, have your vehicle re- paired as soon as possible. The cost of such • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning repairs is considered the responsibility of materials such as steel wool or scouring the owner.

247 • If you carry special cargo such as chemi- Seat Belt Maintenance Plastic And Coated Parts cals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with that such materials are well packaged and Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl sealed. chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This upholstery. will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, weaken the fabric. CAUTION! consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove • Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry soon as possible. An authorized dealer has tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco- touch up paint to match the color of your with a soft cloth. rated surfaces of the interior may cause vehicle. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or permanent damage. Wipe away immedi- worn or if the buckles do not work properly. ately. INTERIORS • Damage caused by these type of prod- WARNING! ucts may not be covered by your New Seats And Fabric Parts Vehicle Limited Warranty. Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol- A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE collision and leave you with no protection. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses stery and carpeting. Inspect the belt system periodically, The lenses in front of the instruments in this checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When WARNING! Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to ately. Do not disassemble or modify the Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning avoid scratching the plastic. purposes. Many are potentially flam- system. Seat belt assemblies must be re- mable, and if used in closed areas they placed after a collision if they have been 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap may cause respiratory harm. damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- solution may be used, but do not use high bing, etc.). alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. 248 2. Dry with a soft cloth. your leather upholstery. Application of a Glass Surfaces leather conditioner is not required to main- Leather Parts tain the original condition. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom- NOTE: any commercial household-type glass mended for leather upholstery. If equipped with light colored leather, it tends cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric Use caution when cleaning the inside rear by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. dye transfer more so than darker colors. The window equipped with electric defrosters or Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive leather is designed for easy cleaning, and windows equipped with radio antennas. Do FCA recommends Mopar total care leather and damage the leather upholstery and not use scrapers or other sharp instruments cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather should be removed promptly with a damp that may scratch the elements. seats as needed. cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are should be taken to avoid soaking your leather CAUTION! using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based mirror. polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de- and/or Ketone based cleaning products to tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result.

249 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instru- ment panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. The VIN number also is stamped into the right front body, on the right front seat cross member. With the seat in the rear most position a flap in the carpet can be cut open and lifted to reveal the VIN. It also appears on the Auto- mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle VIN Location Right Front Body VIN Location

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS registration, and the title. The VIN is also stamped on either right or left NOTE: hand side of the engine block. It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

250 Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE WARNING! SPECIFICATIONS until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway). the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re- to follow this warning may result in per- moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug sonal injury. nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket. FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Torque Specifications 2.0L Engine Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/Bolt Lug Nut/Bolt Torque Size Socket Size This engine is designed 100 Ft-Lbs RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING M12x1.25 19mm (R+M)/2 METHOD to meet all emission (135 N·m) regulations, and pro- vide satisfactory fuel **Use only an authorized dealer recom- Torque Pattern 91 economy and perfor- mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove mance when using any dirt or oil before tightening. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/ high-quality unleaded bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/ “Regular” gasoline hav- Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to bolts are properly seated against the wheel. mounting the tire and remove any corrosion ing a posted octane number of 87 as speci- or loose particles. fied by the (R+M)/2 method. For optimal performance the use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” gasoline is recommended in these engines.

251 While operating on gasoline with the required 2.4L And 3.2L Engines Poor quality gasoline can cause problems octane number, hearing a light knocking sound such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita- from the engine is not a cause for concern. These engines are de- tions. If you experience these symptoms, try However, if the engine is heard making a heavy RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING another brand of gasoline before considering (R+M)/2 METHOD signed to meet all emis- knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. sions regulations and service for the vehicle. Use of gasoline with a lower than recom- provide optimum fuel Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel mended octane number can cause engine fail- 87 economy and perfor- Vehicles ure and may void or not be covered by the New mance when using high Vehicle Limited Warranty. quality unleaded “Regu- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible lar” gasoline having a Poor quality gasoline can cause problems with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol posted octane number of 87 as specified by such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita- (E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane tions. If you experience these symptoms, try content may void the New Vehicle Limited “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will another brand of gasoline before considering Warranty. not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline service for the vehicle. in these engines. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or While operating on gasoline with an octane all of these symptoms: number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound • Operate in a lean mode. from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- • Poor engine performance. diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num- • Poor cold start and cold drivability. ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New • Increased risk for fuel system component Vehicle Limited Warranty. corrosion.

252 Materials Added ToFuel TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Detergent Gasoline Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning contains a higher level agents should be avoided. Many of these of detergents to further materials intended for gum and varnish re- aide in minimizing en- moval may contain active solvents or similar gine and fuel system ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas- deposits. When avail- ket and diaphragm materials. able, the usage of TOP

FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) All Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 2.0 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters 2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters 3.2 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters Cooling System* 2.0 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 9 Quarts 8.6 Liters 2.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters 3.2 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

253 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Standard MS.90032. Engine Oil – 2.0L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Fully Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Penn- zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Penn- TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection – 2.0L Engine 87 Octane Minimum – 91 Octane Recommended, 0-15% Ethanol. Fuel Selection – 2.4L and 3.2L Engines 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

254 CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! tirust products, as they may not be com- • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine patible with the radiator engine coolant other than specified Organic Additive coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into and may plug the radiator. Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti- the cooling system in an emergency, the • This vehicle has not been designed for freeze), may result in engine damage cooling system will need to be drained, use with propylene glycol-based engine and may decrease corrosion protection. flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT cool- coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- ant (conforming to MS.90032), by an glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) gine coolant is different and should not authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based is not recommended. be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti- not use additional rust inhibitors or an- freeze) or any “globally compatible”

Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.

255 MOPAR ACCESSORIES • In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain • For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso- far more than expressive style, premium ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or Authentic Accessories By Mopar protection, or extreme entertainment, you online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and • The following highlights just some of the also benefit from enhancing your vehicle mopar.ca for Canadian residents. many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar with accessories that have been thoroughly featuring a fit, finish, and functionality NOTE: specifically for your Jeep Cherokee. tested and factory-approved. All parts are subject to availability. EXTERIOR: • Rock Rails • Front End Cover • Hood Decal • Wheels • Splash Guards • Skid Plates • Wheel Locks • Locking Gas Cap • Spare Tire Kit • License Plate Frames • Side Window Air Deflectors • Camping Tent • Valve Stem Caps • Vehicle Cover • Chrome Mirror Cover

INTERIOR:

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • Premium Floor Mats • Emergency Roadside Kit • Molded Cargo Tray • Security Cover • Bright Pedal Kit • Katzkin Leather Interiors • All-Weather Mats • Door Sill Guards • Carpet Cargo Mat

ELECTRONICS: • Remote Start • Speaker Upgrades • Electronic Vehicle Tracking System

CARRIERS: • Hitch Receiver • Sport Utility Bars • Roof-mount Bike Carrier • Hitch Balls • Roof Top Cargo Basket • Roof Cargo Box Carrier • Ball Mounts • Roof-mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Roof-Mount Kayak Carrier • Hitch Receiver Wiring Harness • Roof-Mount Canoe Carrier • Roof-Mount Surfboard Carrier

256 CYBERSECURITY • To help further improve vehicle security and WARNING! minimize the potential risk of a security Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and • It is not possible to know or to predict all breach, vehicle owners should: may be equipped with both wired and wire- of the possible outcomes if your vehi- – Routinely check less networks. These networks allow your ve- cle’s systems are breached. It may be www.driveuconnect.com/support/ hicle to send and receive information. This possible that vehicle systems, including software-update.html (U.S. Residents) information allows systems and features in safety related systems, could be im- or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian your vehicle to function properly. paired or a loss of vehicle control could Residents) to learn about available occur that may result in an accident Uconnect software updates. Your vehicle may be equipped with certain – Only connect and use trusted media security features to reduce the risk of unau- involving serious injury or death. • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys- or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a USBs, CDs). tems and wireless communications. Vehicle trusted source. Media of unknown origin software technology continues to evolve over Privacy of any wireless and wired communi- could possibly contain malicious soft- time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup- cations cannot be assured. Third parties may ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it unlawfully intercept information and private pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps may increase the possibility for vehicle communications without your consent. For as needed. Similar to a computer or other systems to be breached. further information, refer to ”Data Collection devices, your vehicle may require software • As always, if you experience unusual & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owners Manual updates to improve the usability and perfor- vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System mance of your systems or to reduce the po- your nearest authorized dealer immedi- (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac- ately. Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s cess to your vehicle systems. Manual. NOTE: The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if • FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you the most recent version of vehicle software directly regarding software updates. (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

257 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO Pushing the center button will make the radio SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF switch between the various modes available CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED (AM/FM/SXM/AUX, etc.). EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are lo- The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped cated on the rear surface of the steering with a push button in the center. The func- (Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the tion of the left-hand control is different de- 8.4–inch Display)

MULTIMEDIA switches. pending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control WARNING! operation in each mode. ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- Radio Operation tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up full responsibility and assume all risks for the next listenable station and pushing related to the use of the features and the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for applications in this vehicle. Only use the the next listenable station. features and applications when it is safe to The button located in the center of the left- do so. Failure to do so may result in an Remote Sound System Controls hand control will tune to the next preset accident involving serious injury or death. (Back View Of Steering Wheel) station that you have programmed in the NOTE: radio preset button. The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch Your vehicle may be transmitting data as with a push button in the center and controls authorized by the subscriber. the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

258 SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the Included Trial Period For New Vehicles and driving experience. When connected to easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services. Your new vehicle may come with an included an operable network, you can: 1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian • Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian located on your rearview mirror. The AS- services starting at the date of vehicle pur- operator who can connect you to emergency SIST button is used for contacting Road- chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica- responders. side Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM tion from your dealer). To activate the trial, you • Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start Guardian Care, and Uconnect Care. The must first register with SiriusXM Guardian. Af- SOS Call button connects you to a your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using ter the trial period, if you wish to continue SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can the Uconnect App from your device. You your SiriusXM Guardian services you can connect you to emergency services. can also do so by logging into your owner choose to purchase a subscription. site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care 2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button is lo- when your vehicle has an operable network cated in the center of the menu bar of the NOTE: connection. Services can only be used radio touchscreen. This is where you can You can check UconnectPhone.com for sys- where coverage is available. manage your Apps. tem and device compatibility. • Receive text or email notifications if your 3. The Uconnect Voice Command and SiriusXM Guardian Activation vehicle's security alarm goes off. Uconnect Phone buttons are located on • Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using the left side of your steering wheel. These To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM GPS technology to help authorities locate buttons let you use your voice to give Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate your vehicle if it is stolen. commands, make phone calls, send and your SiriusXM Guardian services. • Get operator assistance using the ASSIST receive text messages, enter navigation 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your button on your interior rearview mirror. destinations, and control your radio and in-vehicle touchscreen. media devices. 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.

259 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a Download The Uconnect App • Log in to the app using the email address SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent and password you created when you acti- You’re only a few steps away from using who will activate services in your vehicle, vated the services. remote commands and other valuable ser- or select “Enter Email” to activate on the vices. • Press the “Remote” button on the bottom web. menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Re- Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are mote Start (if equipped), and activate your

MULTIMEDIA just a few examples of things you’ll be able to horn and lights remotely. do: • Press the “Location” button on the bottom • Know that help, if you need it, is only a menu bar of the app to bring up a map to button press away with Assist. locate your vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation system. • Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds of miles away. • Press the menu button (three horizontal lines) in the upper left corner of the app to • Find your vehicle, no matter where you access settings and support information. parked, using the convenient Vehicle Finder function. Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C • Use Send & Go to send a navigation route NAV With 8.4-inch Display) from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s Mobile App Subscriptions can be purchased online by navigation system. logging into your owner account. If you need For further information:. To use the Uconnect App: help push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Care • U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/ • Search for and download the Uconnect App or: guardian from the store on your compatible iPhone or Android powered device. • U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827 • Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/ guardian • Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091

260 Maintaining YourSiriusXM Guardian WARNING! WARNING! Account • If anyone in the vehicle could be in • ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten- Selling Your Vehicle danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, tion to the road. Some features are lim- dangerous road conditions or location), When you sell your vehicle, we recommend ited while the vehicle is in motion. Some do not wait for voice contact from a SOS that you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Ac- services, including SOS, will NOT work Call operator. All occupants should exit count information from the vehicle. You can without a subscription and an operable the vehicle immediately and move to a do this by pressing the ASSIST button in your network connection. • Ignoring the rearview mirror light could safe location. vehicle and selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or • The SOS Call system is embedded into mean you may not have SOS Call service call: the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not if needed. If the rearview mirror light is add aftermarket electrical equipment to • U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827 illuminated, have an authorized dealer the vehicle’s electrical system. This may • Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091 service the SOS Call system immedi- prevent your vehicle from sending a sig- ately. Built-In Features • The Occupant Restraint Controller nal to initiate an emergency call. To (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning avoid interference that can cause the WARNING! Light on the instrument panel if a mal- SOS Call system to fail, never add after- function is detected in any part of the market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to the wheel. You have full responsibility and Light is illuminated, the air bag system your vehicle’s electrical system or assume all risks related to the use of the may not be working properly and the modify the antennas on your vehicle. • IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian SOS Call system may not send a signal to POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD- services, and applications in this vehicle. a SOS Call operator if an air bag is ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI- Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is DENT), the Uconnect features, apps, Guardian services when it is safe to do so. illuminated, have an authorized dealer and SiriusXM Guardian services, among Failure to do so may result in an accident service your vehicle immediately. involving serious injury or death. others, will not operate.

261 NOTE: • Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for from your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian Your vehicle may be transmitting data as Uconnect Apps and Features. Care operator, who can connect you to authorized by the subscriber. emergency service operators, to request • SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle help from local police, fire or ambulance 1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped — support for SiriusXM Guardian ser- personnel. If this button is accidentally The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST vices. button, allowing you to speak to a call pressed, you will have ten seconds to stop • Vehicle Care — Total support for your MULTIMEDIA center agent for support: the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call FCA US LLC vehicle. button again or press the “Cancel” button shown on the touchscreen. After ten sec- NOTE: onds has passed, the SOS call will be In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Ser- placed and only the SOS Call operator can vices to you, we may record and monitor your cancel it. The LED light on the rearview conversations with Roadside Assistance, mirror will turn green once a connection to Uconnect Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or a SOS Call operator has been made. The Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are green LED light will turn off once the SOS initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian ser- Call is terminated. Have an authorized vices in your vehicle, your device, or via a SOS Call Button And ASSIST dealer service the vehicle if the rearview landline device, and may share information mirror light is continuously red. On 1 — SOS Call Button obtained through such recording and moni- equipped vehicles, this feature requires a 2 — ASSIST Button toring in accordance with regulatory require- functioning electrical system, a subscrip- ments. You acknowledge, agree, and consent tion, and an operable network connection. to any recording, monitoring or sharing of If a connection is made between a SOS Call • Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a information obtained through any such call flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con- recordings. operator and your vehicle, you understand nected to someone who can help any- and agree that SOS Call operators will stay time. Additional fees may apply. Addi- 2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The on the line, even after you connect with tional information in this section. rearview mirror contains a SOS Call but- emergency services. The Emergency ser- ton that, when pressed, may place a call 262 vices operator may, like any other emer- vehicle has a SiriusXM Guardian subscrip- Hotspot Name and Password. Make gency call, record conversations and tion and an operable network connection, note of this information. sounds in and near your vehicle upon the agent may be able to locate the stolen c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the connection. vehicle and work with law enforcement to main Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check 3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped — help recover it. Your vehicle must have an the box to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot. The Theft Alarm Notification feature noti- operable network connection and must be d. From your portable device Wi-Fi set- fies you via email or text (SMS) message registered with SiriusXM Guardian with an tings menu, select the Hotspot Name when the vehicle’s factory-installed secu- active subscription that includes the appli- rity alarm system has been triggered. cable feature. from the list of available networks and enter the provided Password. There are a number of reasons why your 5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows alarm may have been triggered, one of you and your passengers to connect their e. Open the web browser on your portable which could be that your vehicle was sto- portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi device and enter the following web len. If so, please see the details of the capabilities of your Uconnect system. Pur- address: Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. chasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the use https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login. When activated, Theft Alarm Notification of an Internet-enabled portable device. is automatically set to send you an email f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to your existing one. at the email address you provide should NOTE: the alarm go off. You may also opt to have Uconnect offers a complimentary g. Select and purchase the desired sub- a text message sent to your device. 3–month trial period that includes 1GB of scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot 4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle total data. The trial can be activated any will activate after a few minutes. is stolen, contact local law enforcement time within the first year of new vehicle For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus- immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. ownership. tomer Care at: 866-595-1330. Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box Guardian Care can help locate your vehicle. NOTE: should be un-checked. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent will ask Your vehicle must have a working electrical for the stolen vehicle report number issued b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM by local law enforcement. As long as your from the toushcreeen to locate your Guardian services to operate. 263 SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature You can set-up notifications for your account provides the ability to start the engine on your to receive an email or text (SMS) message If you own a compatible iPhone or Android vehicle, without the keys and from virtually every time a command is sent. Login to powered device, the Uconnect App allows any distance. You can send a request to your Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, vehicle in one of two ways: click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM start your engine or activate your horn and Guardian Notifications. lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- MULTIMEDIA must be equipped with remote start, must ible device. Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped — have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. This feature provides the ability to lock or must have an operable network connection. unlock the door on your vehicle, without the • After 15 minutes if you have not en- Services can only be used where coverage is keys and from virtually any distance. You can tered your vehicle with the key, the available. You can download the App from send a request to your vehicle in one of three engine will shut off automatically. Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store ways: (iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit • You can also send a command to turn- 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- UconnectPhone.com to determine if your de- off an engine that has been remote ible device. vice is compatible. For Uconnect Phone cus- started. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. tomer support and to determine if your device • This remote function requires your ve- is compatible. 3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on hicle to be equipped with a factory- the phone. U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or installed Remote Start system. To uti- call 1-877-855-8400. lize this feature after the Uconnect App To use this feature after the Uconnect App is is downloaded, login with your user downloaded, login using your user name and Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com name and password. password. You will need your four digit or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm call:1-800-387-9983 (French). You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guard- the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on ian Security PIN to confirm the request. your Uconnect App to lock the doors, and Press the “remote start” icon on your press the “open lock” icon to unlock the Uconnect App to remotely start the vehicle. driver’s door. 264 You can set-up notifications for your account your account to receive an email or text Send & Go to receive an email or text (SMS) message (SMS) message every time a command is The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect every time a command is sent. Login to sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at Mobile App allows you to search for a desti- Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to man- nation on your mobile device and then send click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM age SiriusXM Guardian Notifications. the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Naviga- Guardian Notifications. Vehicle Finder tion system. Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s To send a navigation route to your vehicle: easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect noisy parking area by activating the horn and Mobile App allows you to find the location of 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect lights. It may also help if you need to draw your vehicle when you can't remember where Mobile App bottom bar. it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and attention to your vehicle for any reason. You 2. Either type in the destination you would can send a request to your vehicle in one of flash the lights to make finding your vehicle even easier. like to navigate to, or search through one three ways: of the categories provided. To find your vehicle: 1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat- 3. Select the destination you want to route to ible device. 1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect from the list that appears. Mobile App bottom bar. 2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website. 4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and 3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care 2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the then confirm the destination by pressing on the phone. location of your vehicle. “Yes,” to send the navigation route to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle. To use this feature after the Uconnect App is 3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap- downloaded, login using your user name and pears, once your vehicle is located. 5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve- password. You will need your four digit 4. Select your preferred Navigation App to hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm route a path to your vehicle. the pop-up that appears on the touch- the request. You can set-up notifications for screen, when the vehicle is started.

265 UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A Glance MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Buttons 1 — RADIO Button 6 — SCREEN OFF Button 2 — COMPASS Button 7 — MUTE Button 3 — SETTINGS Button 8 — System On/Off — Volume Control Knob 4 — MORE Functions Button 9 — Uconnect PHONE Button 5 — BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob 10 — MEDIA Button

266 Speed Adjusted Volume — If Equipped CAUTION! Audio Setting 1. Press the “Settings” button on the Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, faceplate. on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1, doing so can result in damage to the touch- 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume 2. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button screen. relative to a decrease in vehicle speed. on the touchscreen to open the Audio Clock Setting menu. Loudness — If Equipped To start the clock setting procedure: 3. The Audio Menu shows the following op- Press the “Loudness” button on the touch- tions for you to customize your audio screen to select the Loudness feature. When 1. Press the Settings button on the face- settings. this feature is activated it improves sound plate, then press the “Clock and Date” quality at lower volumes. button. Equalizer Surround Sound — If Equipped 2. Press the “Set Time” button on the Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch- touchscreen. screen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble. Press the “Surround Sound” button on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed by 3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust Use the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen pressing the back arrow button on the touch- the hours or minutes, then select the “AM” or to adjust the equalizer to your desired set- screen. When this feature is activated, it “PM” button on the touchscreen. You can tings. provides simulated surround sound mode. also select 12hr or 24hr format by pressing Balance/Fade the desired button on the touchscreen. Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the 4. Once the time is set press the “Done” touchscreen to adjust the sound from the button on the touchscreen to exit the time speakers. Use the arrow buttons on the screen. touchscreen to adjust the sound level from NOTE: the front and rear or right and left side speak- In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select ers. Press the Center “C” button on the Display Clock. Display Clock turns the clock touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to display in the status bar on or off. the factory setting. 267 Radio Operation the “All” button on the touchscreen on the You can reply to the message using Voice radio home screen displays all of the preset Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of stations for that mode. the 18 pre-defined messages. To store a radio preset manually, follow the Here’s How: steps below: 1. Push the Voice Recognition (VR) 1. Tune to the desired station. and Phone button and wait for the beep, MULTIMEDIA then say “reply.” Uconnect gives the fol- 2. Press and hold the desired numbered but- lowing prompt: “Please say the message ton on the touchscreen for more than two you would like to send.” seconds, or until you hear a confirmation 2. Wait for the beep and say one of the beep. pre-defined messages. (If you are not Radio Operation Seek Next/Previous Buttons sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect will then read the pre-defined messages 1 — Radio Station Preset • Press the Seek up or Seek down button to 2 — All Presets seek through radio stations in AM, FM or allowed. 3 — Seek Next SXM bands. 3. As soon as you hear the message you 4 — Audio Settings would like to send, you can interrupt the • Hold either button to bypass stations with- 5 — Station Information list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect out stopping. 6 — Direct Tune phone button and saying the phrase. 7 — Radio Band Voice TextReply (Not Compatible With Uconnect will confirm the message by 8 — Seek Previous iPhone) reading it back to you. Once your Uconnect system is paired with a Store Radio Presets Manually compatible mobile device, the system can The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of announce a new incoming text message, and the Radio modes. There are four visible pre- read it to you over the vehicle audio system. sets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing 268 4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.” Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Siri lets you use your voice to send text DISPLAY Stuck in Yes. See you later. messages, select media, place phone calls traffic. and much more. Siri uses your natural lan- Uconnect 4 At A Glance Start without No. I’ll be late. guage to understand what you mean and me. responds back to confirm your requests. The Where are I will be <5, system is designed to keep your eyes on the Okay. you? 10, 15, 20, road and your hands on the wheel by letting 25, 30, 45, Are you there Siri help you perform useful tasks. Call me. 60>* min- yet? utes late. To enable Siri push and hold, then release the I’ll call you I need See you in Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on later. directions. <5, 10, 15, the steering wheel. After you hear a double 20, 25, 30, beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and I’m on my 45, 60>* Can’t talk way. minutes. music, get directions, read text messages and Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio right now. many other useful requests. I’m lost. Thanks. Screen

*Use only the numbering listed or the system CAUTION! may not transcribe the message properly. Do NOT attach any object to the touch- NOTE: screen, doing so can result in damage to Voice Text Reply and Voice Texting features the screen. require a compatible mobile device enabled with Bluetooth Message Access Profile NOTE: (MAP). iPhone and some other smartphones Uconnect screen images are for illustration do not currently support Bluetooth MAP. Visit purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- UconnectPhone.com for system and device ware for your vehicle. compatibility. 269 Setting The Time Balance/Fade volume level indicator. This alters the auto- matic adjustment of the audio volume with • For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the variation to vehicle speed. press the time display at the top of the touchscreen to Balance audio between the screen. Press “Yes.” front speakers or fade the audio between Loudness — If Equipped the rear and front speakers. • If the time is not displayed at the top of the • Press the “On” button on the touchscreen screen, press the “Settings” button on the • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or to activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deac- MULTIMEDIA touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or tivate this feature. When Loudness is On, the “Clock & Date” button on the touch- press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the sound quality at lower volumes screen, then check or uncheck this option. the Balance/Fade. improves. • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Equalizer AUX Volume Offset Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch- • Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on • If these features are not available, uncheck screen to activate the Equalizer screen. the touchscreen to activate the AUX Vol- the Sync Time box. • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch- ume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out screen, or press and drag over the level bar is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–” of the Clock Setting screen. for each of the equalizer bands. The level buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans be- Audio Settings value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of tween plus or minus three, is displayed • Press the “Audio” button on the touch- the bands. above the adjustment bar. screen to activate the Audio settings screen Auto Play — If Equipped to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed Speed Adjusted Volume • Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch- Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loud- • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The ness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and on the touchscreen to activate the Speed Auto Play feature has two settings “On” Radio Off With Door. Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad- and “Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins • You can return to the Radio screen by justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the playing from a connected device, immedi- pressing the “X” located at the top right. ately after it is connected to the radio. 270 Auto On Radio — If Equipped Drag & Drop Menu Bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected • The Radio automatically turns on when App to replace an existing shortcut in the The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar. vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was main menu bar are easily changed for your on or off at last ignition off. convenience. Simply follow these steps: The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now Radio Off With Door — If Equipped be an active App/shortcut. • Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off NOTE: With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door This feature is only available if the vehicle is feature, when activated, keeps the radio on in PARK. until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired. Uconnect 4 Main Menu

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.

271 Radio MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 6 — Seek Up 2 — Toggle Between Presets 7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station 3 — Status Bar 8 — Seek Down 4 — Main Category Bar 9 — Browse And Manage Presets 5 — Audio Settings 10 — Radio Bands

272 the arrow button on the touchscreen is Android Auto — If Equipped WARNING! released. Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on Direct Tune system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or the wheel. You have full responsibility and higher, powered smartphone with a data plan, assume all risks related to the use of the • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing that allows you to project your smartphone Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian the “Tune” button on the screen, and en- services, and applications in this vehicle. tering the desired station number. and a number of its apps onto the touch- Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM screen radio display. Android Auto automati- Store Radio Presets Manually Guardian services when it is safe to do so. cally brings you useful information, and orga- Failure to do so may result in an accident Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, nizes it into simple cards that appear just involving serious injury or death. 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They when they are needed. Android Auto can be are shown at the top of your radio screen. To used with Google's best-in-class speech tech- • To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra- see the 12 preset stations per band, press the nology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs dio” button on the touchscreen. arrow button on the touchscreen at the top and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the Selecting Radio Stations right of the screen to toggle between the two radio display’s touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android Auto follow the • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or sets of six presets. following steps: SXM) button on the touchscreen. To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below: 1. Download the Android Auto app from the Seek Up/Seek Down Google Play store on your Android- 1. Tune to the desired station. • Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on powered smartphone. the touchscreen for less than two seconds 2. Press and hold the desired numbered but- 2. Connect your Android powered smart- to seek through radio stations. ton on the touchscreen for more than two phone to one of the media USB ports in seconds or until you hear a confirmation • Press and hold either arrow button on the your vehicle. If you have not downloaded beep. touchscreen for more than two seconds to the Android Auto app to your smartphone bypass stations without stopping. The radio before plugging in the device for the first will stop at the next listenable station once time, the app begins to download. 273 NOTE: Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can Be sure to use the factory-provided USB be utilized using your smartphone’s data cable that came with your phone, as af- plan: termarket cables may not work. • Google Maps for navigation Your phone may ask you to approve the use of the Android Auto app before use. • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, MULTIMEDIA etc. for music • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu- nication Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage • Hundred of compatible apps, and many more! Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped

NOTE: Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car- To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an Play, the smarter, more secure way to use area with cellular coverage. Android Auto your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on may use cellular data and your cellular cov- the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen Android Auto display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and erage is shown in the upper right corner of the your voice with Siri to get access to Apple radio screen. Once Android Auto has made a 3. Once the device is connected and recog- Music, Maps, Messages, and more. nized, Android Auto should automatically connection through USB, Android Auto will launch, but you can also launch it by also connect via Bluetooth. touching the Android Auto icon on the touchscreen, located under Apps.

274 To use CarPlay, make sure you are using Once CarPlay is up and running on your UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set- Uconnect system, the following features can tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan: WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY very first connection only, and then use the • Phone Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance following procedure: • Music 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. • Messages • Maps NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided Light- NOTE: ning cable that came with your phone, as To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is aftermarket cables may not work. turned on, and that you are in an area with 2. Once the device is connected and recog- cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov- nized, CarPlay should automatically erage is shown on the left side of the radio launch, but you can also launch it by screen. Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio touching the CarPlay icon on the touch- screen, located under Apps. WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in this vehicle. CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do so. CarPlay 275 • If the time is not displayed at the top of the Audio Settings WARNING! screen, press the “Settings” button on the • Press the “Audio” button on the touch- Failure to do so may result in an accident touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press screen to activate the Audio settings screen involving serious injury or death. the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and then check or uncheck this option. Speed Adjusted Volume. • Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and CAUTION! • You can return to the Radio screen by Set Time Minutes to adjust the time. MULTIMEDIA Do NOT attach any object to the touch- pressing the “X” located at the top right. • If these features are not available, uncheck screen, doing so can result in damage to the Sync Time box. Balance/Fade the screen. • Press “X” to save your settings and exit out • Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the NOTE: of the Clock Setting screen. touchscreen to Balance audio between the Uconnect screen images are for illustration front speakers or fade the audio between Background Themes the rear and front speakers. purposes only and may not reflect exact soft- ware for your vehicle. • Screen background themes are selectable • Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or Setting The Time like to set a theme, follow the instructions press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust • Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati- below. the Balance/Fade. cally via GPS, so it should not require any • Press the “Settings” button on the touch- Equalizer time adjustment. If you do need to set the screen and select the display menu. • Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch- time manually, follow the instructions be- • Then press “Set Theme” button on the screen to activate the Equalizer screen. low for Model 4C NAV. touchscreen and select a theme. • Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch- • For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then screen, or press and drag over the level bar press the time display at the top of the for each of the equalizer bands. The level screen. Press “Yes.” value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands. 276 Speed Adjusted Volume Drag & Drop Menu Bar 1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen. • Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button The Uconnect features and services in the on the touchscreen to activate the Speed main menu bar are easily changed for your 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad- convenience. Simply follow these steps: App to replace an existing shortcut in the justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the main menu bar. volume level indicator. This alters the auto- The new app shortcut, that was dragged matic adjustment of the audio volume with down onto the main menu bar, will now variation to vehicle speed. be an active App/shortcut. NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Main Menu

277 Radio MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV Radio 1 — Radio Station Presets 7 — Audio Settings 2 — Toggle Between Presets 8 — Seek Up 3 — Status Bar 9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station 4 — View Small Navigation Map 10 — Seek Down 5 — HD Radio 11 — Browse And Manage Presets 6 — Main Category Bar 12 — Radio Bands

278 Direct Tune • With an HD radio receiver, the listener is WARNING! provided with a clear sound that enhances • Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the listening experience. HD radio can also ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the “Tune” button on the screen, and en- transmit data such as song title or artist. the wheel. You have full responsibility and tering the desired station number. assume all risks related to the use of the Android Auto — If Equipped Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian Store Radio Presets Manually services, and applications in this vehicle. Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They Guardian services when it is safe to do so. higher, powered smartphone with a data plan, are shown at the top of your radio screen. To Failure to do so may result in an accident that allows you to project your smartphone involving serious injury or death. see the 12 preset stations per band, press the and a number of its apps onto the touch- arrow button on the touchscreen at the top screen radio display. Android Auto automati- • To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra- right of the screen to toggle between the two dio” button on the touchscreen. cally brings you useful information, and orga- sets of six presets. nizes it into simple cards that appear just Selecting Radio Stations To store a radio preset manually, follow the when they are needed. Android Auto can be • Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or steps below: used with Google's best-in-class speech tech- SXM) button on the touchscreen. nology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs 1. Tune to the desired station. and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the Seek Up/Seek Down 2. Press and hold the desired numbered button radio display’s touchscreen to control many • Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on on the touchscreen for more than two sec- of your apps. To use Android Auto follow the touchscreen for less than two seconds onds or until you hear a confirmation beep. these steps: to seek through radio stations. 1. Download the Android Auto app from the HD Radio — If Equipped Google Play store on your Android- • Press and hold either arrow button on the • HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C powered smartphone. touchscreen for more than two seconds to NAV) operates similar to conventional radio bypass stations without stopping. The radio 2. Connect your Android powered smart- except it allows broadcasters to transmit a will stop at the next listenable station once the phone to one of the media USB ports in high-quality digital signal. arrow button on the touchscreen is released. your vehicle. If you have not downloaded 279 the Android Auto app to your smartphone if it does not, refer to the Uconnect Own- NOTE: before plugging in the device for the first er’s Manual Supplement for the proce- To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an time, the app begins to download. dure to enable the feature “AutoShow.” area with cellular coverage. Android Auto You can also launch it by pressing Android may use cellular data and your cellular cov- NOTE: Auto located in the “Apps” menu. If you erage is shown in the upper right corner of the Be sure to use the factory-provided USB use Android Auto frequently you can move radio screen.

MULTIMEDIA cable that came with your phone, as af- the app to the menu bar at the bottom of termarket cables may not work. the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button and locate the Android Auto app; then Your phone may ask you to approve the drag the selected App to replace an exist- use of the Android Auto app before use. ing shortcut in the main menu bar. Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: • Google Maps for navigation Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage • Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, Maps etc. for music Push and hold the VR button on the steering • Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu- Android Auto wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask nication Google to take you to a desired destination by 3. Once Android Auto has made a connec- • Hundred of compatible apps, and many voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon tion through USB, Android Auto will also more! in Android Auto to access Google Maps. connect via Bluetooth. The system dis- plays the Android Auto home screen. Android Auto automatically launches, but 280 NOTE: using Android Auto, via voice or any other smartphone’s data plan, you can stream end- If the VR button is not held, and is only method, a pop-up appears asking if you less music on the road. pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts would like to switch from Uconnect naviga- NOTE: you and any spoken navigation command tion to smartphone navigation. A pop-up also For music apps, playlists, and stations to work launches the built-in Uconnect navigation appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if with Android Auto, they must be set up on your system. Android Auto is currently in use and you smartphone before using Android Auto. attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route. While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro- Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type vides voice-guided: to the newly used method of navigation and a • Navigation route is planned for the new destination. If • Live traffic information “No” is selected the navigation type remains unchanged. • Lane guidance For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canadian Residents). Android Auto Music For further information on the navigation func- tion, please refer to https://support.google.com/ NOTE: android or https://support.google.com/ To see the metadata for the music playing androidauto/. through Android Auto, select the Uconnect System’s media screen. Music Google Maps For further information refer to Android Auto allows you to access and stream https://support.google.com/androidauto. NOTE: your favorite music with apps like Google Play If you are using the built-in Uconnect naviga- Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your tion system, and you try and start a new route 281 Communication Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped With Android Auto connected, press and hold Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car- the VR button on the steering wheel to acti- Play, the smarter, more secure way to use vate voice recognition specific to the Android your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen text messages, have incoming text messages display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and MULTIMEDIA read out loud, and place and receive hands- your voice with Siri to get access to Apple free calls. Music, Maps, Messages, and more. To use CarPlay, make sure you are using Android Auto Phone iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set- tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the Apps very first connection only, and then use the The Android Auto App will display all the following procedure: compatible apps that are available to use 1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media with Android Auto, every time it is launched. USB ports in your vehicle. You must have the compatible app down- loaded, and you must be signed in to the app NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided Light- for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to Android Auto Contact ning cable that came with your phone, as g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of avail- aftermarket cables may not work. able apps for Android Auto.

282 2. Once the device is connected, the system Once CarPlay is up and running on your Phone displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple Uconnect system, the following features can With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button CarPlay automatically launches, but if be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan: on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual • Phone recognition session. You can also press and Supplement for the procedure to enable • Music hold the Home button within CarPlay to start the feature “AutoShow.” You can also talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls launch it by pressing the CarPlay icon • Messages or listen to voice mail as you normally would located in the “Apps” menu. If you use • Maps using Siri on your iPhone. Apple CarPlay frequently you can move the app to the menu bar at the bottom of NOTE: NOTE: the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel launches a built-in VR and locate the CarPlay app; then drag and turned on, and that you are in an area with session, not a Siri session, and it will not drop the selected App to replace an exist- cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov- function with CarPlay. ing shortcut in the main menu bar. erage is shown on the left side of the radio screen.

CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage

283 Music Maps • If you are using the built-in Uconnect navi- gation system, and you try and start a new CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your route using CarPlay, via voice or any other playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push method, a pop-up appears asking if you iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select and hold the VR button on the steering wheel would like to switch from Uconnect naviga- third party audio apps including music, to use Siri to set your desired destination. tion to iPhone navigation. A pop-up also news, sports, podcasts and more. Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination by appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if MULTIMEDIA pressing Destinations and selecting a cat- CarPlay navigation is currently in use and egory, by launching Siri from the destinations you attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect page, or even by typing in a destination. route. Selecting “Yes” switches the naviga- tion type to the newly used method of navigation and a route will be planned for the new destination. If “No” is selected the navigation type remains unchanged.

Apple Music

Messages Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to Maps use Siri to send or reply to text messages. NOTE: Since everything is done by voice, Siri can also read incoming text messages so you • If the VR button is not held, and is only Navigation Pop-Up don’t have to. pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system. 284 Apps Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 3), or • Doors & Locks press the “Apps” button (Uconnect 4 or To use an app that is compatible with Car- • Auto-On Comfort 4C/4C NAV) located near the bottom of the Play, you must have the compatible app al- • SiriusXM Setup ready downloaded to your iPhone and you touchscreen, then press the “Settings” but- must also be signed in. Refer to http:// ton on the touchscreen to access the Settings NOTE: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (U.S. Residents) screen. When making a selection, scroll up or Depending on the vehicles options, feature or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Ca- down until the preferred setting is high- settings may vary. nadian Residents) to see the latest list of lighted, then press the preferred setting until Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime- available apps for CarPlay. a check-mark appears next to the setting, dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor- showing that setting has been selected. The mation. UCONNECT SETTINGS following feature settings are available: • Language • Engine Off Options The Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings • Display • Compass — If Equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driv- • Units • Audio ing Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off • Voice • Phone/Bluetooth Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/ • Clock • Suspension — If Bluetooth, Suspension, SiriusXM Setup, Re- Equipped store Settings, Clear Personal Data, and Sys- •Camera—If • AUX Switches Equipped tem Information through buttons on the touchscreen. • Safety & Driving • Restore Settings Assistance • Brakes • Clear Personal Data • Mirrors & Wipers — • System Information If Equipped • Lights

285 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — Located in the front storage area, this feature IF EQUIPPED allows an External USB device or AUX elec- tronic device to be plugged into the port or jack. There are also 4 USB Ports located on the back of the center console, located to the left

MULTIMEDIA of the Power Inverter. There are two USB-C Ports and two Standard USB-Ports. Some of the ports may be a charge-only port, while the other two allow you to play music from iPod/ MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle’s sound system

Rear Center Console Media Hub 1 — USB-C Port 1 2 — USB-C Port 2 (Charge Only) Instrument Panel Media Hub 3 — Standard USB Port 1 4 — Standard USB Port 2 (Charge 1 — AUX Jack Only) 2 — USB Port

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

286 NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED • The information in the section below is only applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display system. Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigation sys- tem. Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume 1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch- screen in the lower right area of the screen. 2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guid- ance” button on the touchscreen. 3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen.

287 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation 1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories 5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination 2 — Find A Destination 6 — Navigation Settings 3 — View Map 7 — Emergency 4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination 8 — Information

288 Finding Points Of Interest One-Step Voice Destination Entry • Once you have entered your Home location, select the “Save Home” button located on • From the main Navigation menu, press the • Enter a navigation destination without tak- the lower left-hand side of your touch- “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, ing your hands off the wheel. screen. then press the “Points of Interest” button • Just push the Uconnect Voice Command on the touchscreen. • To delete a saved Home location (or other button on the steering wheel, wait for saved locations), so you can save a new • Select a category and then a subcategory, if the beep and say something like, "Find Home location, press the “Nav” button on necessary. Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills the touchscreen, and in the “Where To” • Select your destination and press the MI." screen, press “Edit Where To” and then “GO!” button on the touchscreen. press the “Home” button on the touch- NOTE: screen. Under the Manage screen press the Using your touchscreens keyboard is not Finding A Place By Spelling The Name “Reset Location” button. A confirmation available while your vehicle is in motion. • From the Main Navigation Menu press the screen will appear asking if you “Are you However, you can also use Voice Commands “Where to?” button on the touchscreen, sure you want to reset this location?” Press to enter an address while moving. Refer to press the “Points of Interest” button on the “Reset” to confirm the deletion. Set a new “Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name” Home location by following the previous this section for further information. or “Search All” button on the touchscreen. instructions. • Enter the name of your destination. Setting YourHome Location Home • Press the “List” or “OK” button on the • To add a Home location, press the “Nav” • A Home location must be saved in the sys- touchscreen. button on the touchscreen in the menu bar tem. From the Main Navigation menu, press • Select your destination and press the to access the Navigation system and the the “Home” button on the touchscreen. “GO!” button on the touchscreen. Main Navigation menu. • Press the “Home” button on the touch- screen. You can add a Home location by either selecting “Spell City,” “Spell Street,” or “Select Country.” Select County is auto- matically filled out based on your state. 289 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map 1 — Distance To Next Turn 5 — Your Location On The Map 2 — Next Turn Street 6 — Navigation Main Menu 3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival 7 — Current Street Location 4 — Zoom In And Out 8 — Navigation Routing Options

290 Your route is marked with a blue line on the NOTE: • View conditions for points along your route map. If you depart from the original route, If the route you are currently taking is the only and beyond. Available in over 130 markets. your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon reasonable option, the device may not calcu- SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With could appear as you travel on major roadways. late a detour. For more information, see your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement. 8.4–inch Display) Adding A Stop SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With In addition to delivering over 130 channels of • To add a stop you must be navigating a 8.4–inch Display) the best sports, entertainment, talk, and route. commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre- • Press the “Menu” button on the touch- Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It. mium data services that work in conjunction screen to return to the Main Navigation Avoid congestion before you reach it. By with compatible navigation systems. menu. enhancing your vehicle's navigation system SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful • Press the “Where To?” button on the touch- with the ability to see detailed traffic infor- information into your vehicle and right to your screen, then search for the extra stop. mation, you can pinpoint traffic incidents, fingertips. When another location has been selected, determine average traffic speed and estimate • Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel travel time along your route. Since the service you can choose to cancel your previous prices in your area and route to the station is integrated with a vehicle's navigation sys- route, add as the first destination or add as of your choice. the last destination. tem, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the fastest route based on traffic condi- • Movie Listings — Check local movie the- • Press the desired selection and press the tions. atres and listings in your area and route to “GO!” button on the touchscreen. • Detailed information on traffic speed, acci- the theater of your choice. TakingA Detour dents, construction, and road closings. • Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules. • To take a detour you must be navigating a • Traffic information from multiple sources, route. including police and emergency services, • Weather — Check variety of local and na- cameras and road sensors. tional weather information from radar maps • Press the “Detour” button on the • Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic informa- to current and 5-day forecast. touchscreen. tion. 291 SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes after you start your vehicle, Travel Link infor- mation arrives and updates in the back- ground. You can access the information whenever you like, with no waiting.

MULTIMEDIA To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the “SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch- screen. NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the trial subscription included with your vehicle purchase.

292 UCONNECT PHONE Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)

Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 — Call/Redial/Hold 7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu 2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 8 — Text Messaging 3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 9 — Direct Dial Pad 4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 10 — Recent Call Log 5 — Mute Microphone 11 — Browse Phone Book 6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 12 — End Call

293 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 — Favorite Contacts 11 — Recent Call Log 2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 12 — Browse Phone Book Entries 3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 13 — End Call 4 — Siri 14 — Call/Redial/Hold 5 — Mute Microphone 15 — Do Not Disturb 6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 16 — Reply with Text Message 7 — Conference Call* *—Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices 8 — Phone Settings ** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (re- 9 — Text Messaging** quires Bluetooth MAP profile) 10 — Direct Dial Pad

294 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone 11 — Recent Call Log 2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength 12 — Favorite Contacts 3 — Do Not Disturb 13 — Mute Microphone 4 — Reply with Text Message** 14 — Decline Incoming Call 5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name 15 — Answer/Redial/Hold 6 — Conference Call* 16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life 7 — Phone Pairing 17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System 8 — Text Messaging Menu** *—Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices 9 — Direct Dial Pad ** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (re- 10 — Contact Menu quires Bluetooth MAP profile)

295 The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to • For Uconnect Customer Care: 2. Press the “Phone” button. place and receive hands-free mobile phone • U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or 3. Select “Settings.” calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone call 1-877-855-8400. calls using their voice or by using the buttons 4. Select “Paired Phones.” on the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec- Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your 5. Select “Add device.” tion). Mobile Phone ToThe Uconnect System • Uconnect Phone will display an “In

MULTIMEDIA The hands-free calling feature is made pos- Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab- progress” screen while the system is sible through Bluetooth technology — the lishing a wireless connection between a cel- connecting. global standard that enables different elec- lular phone and the Uconnect system. tronic devices to connect to each other wire- Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display: lessly. Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display: your steering wheel, you then have the Uconnect Phone features. NOTE: • The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands- Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. Uconnect 4 • Most mobile phones/devices are compat- ible with the Uconnect system, however 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON some mobile phones/devices may not be position. equipped with all of the required features 2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar Uconnect 3 to utilize all of the Uconnect system fea- on the touchscreen. A message will dis- tures. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON play asking “No phone connected. Do you position. want to pair a phone?” Select Yes. 296 3. After selecting “Yes,” go through the 2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar Pair Your iPhone: steps to pair your phone using your on the touchscreen. Bluetooth connectivity. • A message will display asking, “No 4. Once pairing is successful, a message will Phone Connected. Would you like to display asking, “Make this your Favorite?” pair a phone?” Select Yes. After press- Then select Yes or No. ing Yes, the radio prompts will take you Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display: through the steps to connect your phone via Bluetooth. • Uconnect Phone will display an “In progress” screen while the system is connecting. Once the pairing has been successful, a message will display “Bluetooth pairing successful: The de- vice supports Phone and Audio.” Click “OK.” Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device 3. Select “Settings.” To search for available devices on your 4. Select “Phone/Bluetooth,” and then se- Bluetooth enabled iPhone: Uconnect 4C/4C NAV lect “Paired Phones and Audio Devices.” 1. Press the Settings button. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON 5. The “Add Device” option will be listed 2. Select Bluetooth. position. under the “Paired Phones” section. • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en- abled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth connections.

297 3. When your mobile phone finds the mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this To search for available devices on your Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”. mobile phone the highest priority. This mo- Bluetooth enabled Android Device: bile phone will take precedence over other Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure: 1. Push the Menu button. paired mobile phones within range and will 2. Select Settings. connect to the Uconnect system automati- cally when entering the vehicle. Only one 3. Select Connections.

MULTIMEDIA mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio 4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.” device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply • Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en- abled. Once enabled, the mobile select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/ phone will begin to search for audio device Bluetooth screen, and the Bluetooth connections. Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device. 5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”. Pairing Request Pair Your Android Device: • You may be prompted by your mobile 1. When prompted on the mobile phone, phone to download the phonebook, accept the connection request from check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati- Uconnect Phone. cally download the phonebook. This is so you can make calls by saying the NOTE: name of your contact. Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN number. Select The iPhone's Priority Level When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to Uconnect Device choose whether or not this is your favorite 298 Complete The Android Pairing Procedure: Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority cess. However, first, make sure to delete the Level device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove When the pairing process has successfully Uconnect from the list of devices in your completed, the system will prompt you to phone’s Bluetooth settings. choose whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this You are now ready to make hands-free calls. mobile phone the highest priority. This mo- Press the Uconnect “Phone” button on bile phone will take precedence over other your steering wheel to begin. paired mobile phones within range and will NOTE: connect to the Uconnect system automati- Refer to UconnectPhone.com or cally when entering the vehicle. Only one www.DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio www.DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Resi- device can be connected to the Uconnect dents) or an authorized dealer for additional system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply information on mobile phone pairing and for select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/ Pairing Request a list of compatible phones. audio device Bluetooth screen, and the 1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile Uconnect system will reconnect to the Common Phone Commands (Examples) phone matches the passkey shown on the Bluetooth device. Uconnect system then accept the • “Call John Smith” Bluetooth pairing request. NOTE: • “Call John Smith mobile” Keep in mind that software updates – either NOTE: on your phone or Uconnect system – may • “Dial 1 248 555 1212” Some mobile phones require the PIN to be interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If • “Redial” entered manually, enter the PIN number this happens, simply repeat the pairing pro- shown on the Uconnect screen.

299 Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During • Your phonebook can be browsed on the Changing The Volume Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing Call • Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button can only be done on your phone. To browse, , then say a command. For example, • During a call, press the “Mute” button on press the “Phone” button on the touch- "Help". the Phone main screen, that appears only screen, then the “Phonebook” button on when a call is in progress, to mute and the touchscreen. • Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob unmute the call. to adjust the volume to a comfortable level MULTIMEDIA Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as while the Uconnect system is speaking. Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are And Vehicle shown in the Favorites menu. NOTE: The volume setting for Uconnect is different • During an on-going call, press the “Trans- Voice Command Tips than the audio system. fer” button on the Phone main screen to • Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John transfer an on-going call between handset NOTE: Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater and vehicle. To access help, push the VR button on the system accuracy. Phonebook steering wheel and say "help." Push the VR • You can “link” commands together for button and say "cancel" to cancel the The Uconnect system will automatically sync faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” help session. your phonebook from your paired phone, if for example. Using Do Not Disturb this feature is supported by your phone. • If you are listening to available voice com- Phonebook contacts are updated each time mand options, you do not have to listen to With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi- that the phone is connected. Phonebook en- the entire list. When you hear the command cations from incoming calls and texts, allow- tries are displayed in the Contacts menu. If that you need, push the button on the ing you to keep your eyes on the road and your phone book entries do not appear, check steering wheel, wait for the beep and say hands on the wheel. For your convenience, the settings on your phone. Some phones your command. there is a counter display to keep track of require you to enable this feature manually. your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.

300 To activate Do Not Disturb, select “Pairing” • Auto reply with text message is only avail- 2. Select Bluetooth. on the phone menu bar, and select “Do Not able on phones that supporting Bluetooth • Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the MAP. Disturb” from the Settings menu. You can mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect also activate it using the “Do Not Disturb” Incoming TextMessages system. button at the top of every Phone screen. After pairing your Uconnect system with a 3. Select located under DEVICES next to Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Uconnect. text message, a call or both, when declining Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. an incoming call and send it to voicemail. system can announce a new incoming text Automatic reply messages can be: message and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio system. • “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” To listen to incoming text messages, or any messages currently on the mobile phone, • Create a custom auto reply message up to select the “Messages” menu and press the 160 characters. “Listen” button next to the message you want While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can to listen to. be selected so you can still place a second NOTE: call without being interrupted by incoming Only incoming text messages received during calls. the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read. NOTE: To enable incoming text messaging: • Only the beginning of your custom message iPhone will be seen on the touchscreen. Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages 1. Press the settings button on the mobile • Reply with text message is not compatible phone. with iPhones.

301 Android Devices Helpful Tips And Common Questions To 1. Push the Menu button on the mobile Improve Bluetooth Performance With phone. YourUconnect System 2. Select Settings. Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after pairing: 3. Select Connections. • Set mobile phone to auto-connect or MULTIMEDIA 4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on. trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth • A pop up will appear asking you to settings (Blackberry devices). accept a request for permission to con- • Many mobile phones do not automatically nect to your messages. Select “Don’t reconnect after being restarted (hard re- ask again” and press OK. boot). Your mobile phone can still be con- nected manually. Close all applications that may be operating (refer to mobile Enable Android Device Incoming Text phone manufacturer’s instructions), and Messages follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect Sys- tem”. NOTE: • Perform a factory reset on your mobile All incoming text messages received during phone. Refer to your mobile phone manu- the current ignition cycle will be deleted from facturer or cellular provider for instruc- the Uconnect system when the ignition is tions. This should only be done as a last turned to the OFF position. resort.

302 Mobile Phone won’t pair to system: Can’t make a conference call: • Delete pairing history in mobile phone and • CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) car- Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s riers do not support conference calling. Bluetooth connection settings. Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual • Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the for further information. discovered Bluetooth devices on your mo- Making calls while connected to AUX: bile phone. • Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while • If your vehicle system generates a pin code connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands- the default is 0000. Free Calling. Do not make calls while your Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio • Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack. removing the battery (if removable — see Visual Cues your mobile phone’s owner manual). This UCONNECT VOICE should only be done as a last resort. RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS Mobile Phonebook didn’t download: • Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the Introducing Uconnect “phonebook download” request on your Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with mobile phone. these helpful quick tips. It provides the key • Up to 5,000 contact names with four num- Voice Commands and tips you need to know bers per contact will transfer to the to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or Uconnect 4 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook. Uconnect 4/4C NAV system. • Up to 2,000 contact names with six num- bers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4 system phonebook.

303 Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mo- bile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and pas- senger conversations are examples of MULTIMEDIA noise that may impact recognition. 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and vol- ume while facing straight ahead. The mi- Uconnect 4C NAV crophone is positioned on the rearview If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or mirror and aimed at the driver. in the Apps menus, of your 8.4-inch touch- 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you screen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV sys- must first push either the Voice Recogni- tem. If not, you have a Uconnect 4 with Uconnect Voice Command Buttons tion (VR) or Phone button, wait until after 8.4-inch display system. the beep, then say your Voice Command. 1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text Get Started 5. You can interrupt the help message or 2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Ra- All you need to control your Uconnect system system prompts by pushing the VR or dio, Media, or Climate Functions. For with your voice are the buttons on your steer- Phone button and saying a Voice Com- 8.4–inch System Only: Push To Begin ing wheel. mand from current category. Navigation Function 3 — Push To End Call

304 Basic Voice Commands •“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”

The basic Voice Commands below can be TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to given at any point while using your Uconnect say or want to learn a Voice Command, push system. the VR button and say “Help.” The system provides you with a list of commands. Push the VR button . After the beep, say: •“Cancel” to stop a current voice session •“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio •“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts Media again Uconnect offers connections via USB, Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). voice recognition system’s status. Cues ap- Voice operation is only available for con- Uconnect 3 Radio pear on the touchscreen. nected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all ve- Radio hicles.) Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or Push the VR button . After the beep, say SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would one of the following commands and follow like to hear. (Subscription or included the prompts to switch your media source or SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) choose an artist. Push the VR button . After the beep, •“Change source to Bluetooth” say: Uconnect 4 Radio •“Change source to AUX” •“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” •“Change source to USB” 305 •“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Great- Phone est Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; Making and answering hands-free phone “Play genre Classical” calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone- TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch- book button is illuminated on your touch- screen to see all of the music on your USB screen, your system is ready. Check device. Your Voice Command must match UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone com- MULTIMEDIA exactly how the artist, album, song and genre patibility and pairing instructions. information is displayed. Uconnect 4 Media Push the VR button and the Phone button. After the beep, say one of the follow- ing commands: •“Call John Smith” •“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts” •“Redial (call previous outgoing phone num- ber)” •“Call back (call previous incoming phone Uconnect 3 Media Uconnect 4/4C NAV Media number)” TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the VR button and the Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”

306 2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined mes- sages and follow the system prompts. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES Stuck in Yes. See you later. traffic. Start without No. I’ll be late. me. Where are Okay. you? I will be Uconnect 3 Phone Uconnect 4/4C NAV Phone Are you there Call me. minutes late. yet? Voice TextReply I’ll call you I need later. directions. See you in Uconnect announces incoming text mes- of sages. Push the Phone or VR button I’m on my minutes. way. Can’t talk and say “Listen.” (Must have compatible mo- right now. bile phone paired to Uconnect system.) I’m lost. Thanks. 1. Once an incoming text message is read to TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full you, push the Phone or VR button implementation of the Message Access Pro- Uconnect 4 Phone . After the beep, say: “Reply.” file (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.

307 Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading Climate incoming text messages only. To enable this Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle tempera- feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these tures hands-free and keep everyone comfort- four simple steps: able while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)

MULTIMEDIA Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands: •“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees” •“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees” Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch Display Climate TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be iPhone Notification Settings used to adjust the interior temperature of Navigation (4C NAV) your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to 1 — Select “Settings” The Uconnect navigation feature helps you 2 — Select “Bluetooth” adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if save time and become more productive when 3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Ve- equipped. you know exactly how to get to where you hicle want to go. 4 — Turn On “Show Notifications” 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with Michigan.” iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Climate 308 2. Then follow the system prompts. NOTE: Remote Horn & Lights Your vehicle may be transmitting data as TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR but- Roadside Assistance Call authorized by the subscriber. ton . After the beep, say: “Find nearest Vehicle Health Reports** coffee shop.” An included trial and/or subscription is re- quired to take advantage of the SiriusXM Vehicle Health Alert** Guardian services in the next section of this Performance Pages Plus** guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps button on the Uconnect **If vehicle is equipped. 4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started. Register (4C/4C NAV) NOTE: To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM SiriusXM Guardian is available only on Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate equipped vehicles purchased within the con- your SiriusXM Guardian services. tinental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation Canada. Services can only be used where 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your coverage is available; see coverage map for in-vehicle touchscreen. SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If details. 2. Select the Activate Services icon from Equipped SOS Call your list of apps. Theft Alarm Notification 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a CAUTION! SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent Remote Door Lock/Unlock who will activate services in your vehicle, or Some SiriusXM Guardian services, includ- select “Enter Email” to activate on the web. ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call Send & Go will NOT work without an operable LTE Vehicle Finder • U.S. residents visit: (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network www.siriusxm.com/guardian. Stolen Vehicle Assistance connection compatible with your device. • Canadian residents visit: Remote Vehicle Start** www.siriusxm.ca/guardian. 309 Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) • Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a map to Your vehicle will send you a monthly email locate your vehicle or send a location to report, which summarizes the performance of your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on Finder and Send & Go , if equipped. top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. • Press the “Settings” side menu in the up- MULTIMEDIA Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health per left corner of the app to bring up app settings. Alerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need your attention. For further NOTE: information, refer to your owner’s manual. For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). You’re only a few steps away from using SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) remote commands and sending a destination Mobile App from your phone to your vehicle. Need to find a gas station, view local movie To use the Uconnect Mobile App: listings, check a sports score or the5-day • Once you have registered your SiriusXM weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a Guardian services, download the Uconnect suite of services that brings a wealth of infor- App to your mobile device. Use your Owner mation right to your Uconnect 4C NAV sys- Account login and password to open the tem. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.) app. Push the VR button . After the beep, say • Once on the “Remote” screen, you can one of the following commands: begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Re- •“Show fuel prices” mote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn •“Show 5 - day weather forecast” and lights remotely, if equipped. •“Show extended weather” 310 TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and Using Do Not Disturb Voice Command. music, get directions, read text messages and With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi- many other useful requests. cations from incoming calls and texts, allow- ing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail. SiriusXM Travel Link Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available Automatic reply messages can be: Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped • “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls • Create a custom auto reply message up to and much more. Siri uses your natural lan- 160 characters. guage to understand what you mean and While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can responds back to confirm your requests. The be selected so you can still place a second system is designed to keep your eyes on the call without being interrupted by incoming road and your hands on the wheel by letting calls. Siri help you perform useful tasks. Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free Available To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double 311 NOTE: Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button • Only the beginning of your custom message on the steering wheel, or press and hold the will be seen on the touchscreen. “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which recognizes • Reply with text message is not compatible natural voice commands, to use a list of your with iPhones. smartphone’s features:

MULTIMEDIA • Auto reply with text message is only avail- • Maps able on phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP. • Music • Phone Android Auto — If Equipped Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display • Text Messages Android Auto allows you to use your voice to Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual • Additional Apps interact with Android’s best-in-class speech Supplement for further information. technology through your vehicle’s voice rec- ognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory- provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto On 7-inch Display

312 Apple CarPlay — If Equipped General Information Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to The following regulatory statement applies to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in recognition system, and use your smart- this vehicle: phone’s data plan to project your iPhone and This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC a number of its apps onto your Uconnect Rules and with Industry Canada license- touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- higher, to one of the media USB ports, using ject to the following two conditions: the factory-provided Lightning cable, and Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin ference, and Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button 2. This device must accept any interference on the steering wheel, or press and hold the received, including interference that may “Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to ac- cause undesired operation. tivate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s NOTE: features: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- • Phone ance could void the user’s authority to oper- Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display • Music ate the equipment. • Messages Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information. • Maps • Additional Apps

313 Additional Information © 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos

MULTIMEDIA are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Uconnect System Support: • U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) • Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) SiriusXM Guardian services support: • U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827 • Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091

314 SUGGESTIONS FOR and list the items in order of priority. At many • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental talk to the general manager or owner of the OBTAINING SERVICE FOR vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need authorized dealer. They want to know if you YOUR VEHICLE a rental, it is advisable to make these ar- need assistance. rangements when you call for an appoint- Prepare For The Appointment • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve ment. the concern, you may contact the manufac- If you are having warranty work done, be sure turer's customer center. to have the right papers with you. Take your IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE warranty folder. All work to be performed may Any communication to the manufacturer's The manufacturer and its authorized dealer not be covered by the warranty. Discuss ad- customer center should include the following are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We ditional charges with the service manager. information: want you to be happy with our products and Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's services. • Owner's name and address service history. This can often provide a clue • Owner's telephone number (home and of- to the current problem. Warranty service must be done by an autho- fice) rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you Prepare A List take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They • Authorized dealer name Make a written list of your vehicle's problems know your vehicle the best, and are most • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) or the specific work you want done. If you've concerned that you get prompt and high qual- • Vehicle delivery date and mileage had an accident or work done that is not on ity service. The manufacturer's authorized your maintenance log, let the service advisor dealer have the facilities, factory-trained FCA US LLC Customer Center know. technicians, special tools, and the latest in- formation to ensure the vehicle is fixed cor- P.O. Box 21–8004 Be Reasonable With Requests rectly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 If you list a number of items and you must This is why you should always talk to an Phone: (877) 426-5337 have your vehicle by the end of the day, authorized dealer service manager first. Most discuss the situation with the service advisor matters can be resolved with this process. 315 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Service Contract Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) P.O. Box 1621 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 To assist customers who have hearing diffi- culties, the manufacturer has installed spe- cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac- Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. 387-9983 French Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur- In Mexico Contact hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional tele- chased a manufacturer's service contract, Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three Sante Fe C.P. 05109 communicate with the manufacturer by dial- ing 1-800-380-CHRY. weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have Mexico, D. F. any questions about the service contract, call Canadian residents with hearing difficulties CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE the manufacturer's Service Contract National In Mexico City: 5081-7568 that require assistance can use the special Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca- needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng- For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for lish / (800) 387-9983 French). Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con- nect with a Bell Relay Service operator. The manufacturer will not stand behind any FCA Caribbean LLC service contract that is not the manufacturer's P.O. Box 191857 service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's San Juan 00919-1857 service contract. If you purchased a service Phone: (877) 426-5337 contract that is not a manufacturer's service Fax: (787) 782-3345 contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty

316 expires, please refer to the contract docu- WARRANTY INFORMATION If NHTSA receives similar complaints, ments, and contact the person listed in those it may open an investigation, and if it See the Warranty Information Booklet for the documents. finds that a safety defect exists in a terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran- We appreciate that you have made a major ties applicable to this vehicle and market. group of vehicles, it may order a recall investment when you purchased the vehicle. and remedy campaign. However, An authorized dealer has also made a major MOPAR PARTS NHTSA cannot become involved in in- investment in facilities, tools, and training to dividual problems between you, an au- assure that you are absolutely delighted with Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories the ownership experience. You will be are available from an authorized dealer. They are thorized dealer or FCA US LLC. pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve recommended for your vehicle in order to help To contact NHTSA, you may call the any warranty issues or related concerns. keep the vehicle operating at its best. Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- WARNING! REPORTING SAFETY 9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; Engine exhaust (internal combustion en- DEFECTS or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, gines only), some of its constituents, and In The 50 United States And Washington, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West certain vehicle components contain, or Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. emit, chemicals known to the State of D.C. You can also obtain other information California to cause cancer and birth de- If you believe that your vehicle has a fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi- about motor vehicle safety from http:// defect that could cause a crash or cause tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles www.safercar.gov. and certain products of component wear injury or death, you should immediately contain, or emit, chemicals known to the inform the National Highway Traffic State of California to cause cancer and Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- birth defects, or other reproductive harm. tion to notifying FCA US LLC.

317 In Canada PUBLICATION ORDER NOTE: If you believe that your vehicle has a FORMS • The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec- safety defect, you should contact the tronic files are also available on the • You can purchase a copy of the Owner's Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT Customer Service Department imme- Manual, United States customers may visit websites. diately. Canadian customers who wish the Jeep Contact Us page at www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the page and select • Click on the “For Owners” tab, select to report a safety defect to the Cana- “Owner/Service Manuals”. Then select the “Contact Us” link, then select the dian government should contact your desired model year and vehicle from “Owner’s Manual and Glove Compartment Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle De- the drop down lists. Material” from the left menu. You can also fect Investigations and Recalls at purchase a copy by calling 1-877- 1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// 426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. (Canada).

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE • Replacement User Guide kits or, if you prefer, additional printed copies of the Owner's Manual, may be purchased by vis- iting www.techauthority.com (U.S.) or by calling 1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada).

318 INDEX

Accessories...... 256 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 220 Automatic Transmission ...... 147 Mopar ...... 256 Air Conditioning Filter...... 47, 221 Fluid Level Check ...... 227 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...... 46 Auto Up Power Windows...... 48 Off ...... 160, 162 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . .220, 221 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet On...... 160, 162 Air Conditioning System ...... 46, 220 (Power Outlet) ...... 59 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Air Filter ...... 219 Auxiliary Power Outlet ...... 59 (Cruise Control)...... 159 Air Pressure Adding Fuel ...... 172 Tires ...... 236 Battery ...... 68, 218 Additives, Fuel...... 253 Alarm Charging System Light ...... 68 AirBag...... 113 Arm The System ...... 18 Belts, Seat ...... 140 Air Bag Operation ...... 115 Disarm The System ...... 19 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 90 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 112, 115 Security Alarm ...... 70 B-Pillar Location ...... 232 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 119 Alarm (Security Alarm)...... 18 Brake Assist System ...... 80 Enhanced Accident Response .124, 210 Alarm System (Security Alarm)...... 18 Brake Control System, Electronic .....80 Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 210 All Wheel Drive (AWD) ...... 149 Brake System Front Air Bag ...... 113, 115 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 253 Parking ...... 144 If Deployment Occurs ...... 123 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 79 Warning Light ...... 67 Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 119 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 70 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...... 147 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .124 Arming System (Security Alarm) ...... 18 Bulb Replacement ...... 184 Maintenance ...... 124 Assist, Hill Start...... 81 Bulbs, Light ...... 142 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .113 Audio Systems (Radio) ...... 268 Transporting Pets ...... 139 Automatic Door Locks ...... 22 Camera, Rear ...... 171 Air Bag Light...... 67, 112, 140 Automatic Headlights ...... 33, 34 Capacities, Fluid ...... 253 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . .46 Caps, Filler Filter) ...... 219 Automatic Transaxle ...... 146 Fuel ...... 204 319 Oil (Engine) ...... 215, 216, 217 Manual ...... 38 Driver’s Seat Tilt Back ...... 23 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 140 Clock ...... 267 Car Washes ...... 247 Clock Setting...... 267 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary

INDEX Change Oil Indicator ...... 64 Compact Spare Tire ...... 240 (Power Outlet) ...... 59 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 192, 227 Contract, Service ...... 316 Electric Brake Control System Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 228 Cooling System ...... 226 Anti-Lock Brake System ...... 79 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Coolant Capacity ...... 253 Electronic Roll Mitigation .....82, 85 Indicator Light) ...... 77 Inspection ...... 226 Electric Parking Brake ...... 144 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .139 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .253 Electronic Brake Control System ...... 80 Checks, Safety...... 139 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...... 157 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Child Restraint...... 125 Cruise Light ...... 74, 75, 76 Control) ...... 157, 158 Child Restraints Customer Assistance ...... 315 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....82 Booster Seats ...... 128 Customer Programmable Features . . . .285 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Child Seat Installation ...... 137 Cybersecurity...... 257 Light ...... 68 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Emergency, In Case Of Belt ...... 135 Daytime Running Lights ...... 33 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 180 Infants And Child Restraints .....127 Dealer Service ...... 219 Jacking ...... 192, 227 LATCH Positions ...... 130 Defroster, Windshield...... 141 Jump Starting ...... 202 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Diagnostic System, Onboard ...... 76 Overheating ...... 204 Children ...... 129 Dipsticks Emission Control System Maintenance . .77 Older Children And Child Oil (Engine) ...... 218 Engine...... 215, 216, 217 Restraints ...... 127 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 206 Air Cleaner ...... 219 Seating Positions ...... 129 Disturb ...... 300, 311 Break-In Recommendations ...... 143 Child Safety Locks ...... 23 Door Ajar ...... 68, 69 Checking Oil Level ...... 218 Cleaning Door Ajar Light ...... 68, 69 Cooling ...... 226 Wheels ...... 241 Door Locks, Automatic ...... 22 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 140 Climate Control ...... 38 Fuel Requirements ...... 251 320 Jump Starting ...... 202 Folding Rear Seats ...... 23 Heated Mirrors...... 33 Oil...... 253 Forward Collision Warning ...... 94 Hill Descent Control ...... 87 Oil Filler Cap ...... 215, 216, 217 Four Wheel Drive ...... 149 Hill Descent Control Indicator ...... 87 Oil Filter ...... 219 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 205 Hill Start Assist ...... 81 Oil Selection ...... 253 Front And Rear ParkSense System . . . .166 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ...... 56 Overheating ...... 204 Front ParkSense System ...... 166 Hood Prop ...... 52 Enhanced Accident Response Fuel Hood Release ...... 52 Feature ...... 124, 210 Additives ...... 253 Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 140 Light ...... 71 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 180 Instrument Cluster Exhaust System ...... 140 Materials Added ...... 253 Instrument Cluster ...... 64 Exterior Lights ...... 142 Tank Capacity ...... 253 Instrument Cluster Display Fueling ...... 172 Information Display ...... 63 Filters Fuses ...... 185 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning.....248 Air Cleaner ...... 219 Interior Appearance Care...... 248 Air Conditioning ...... 47, 221 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ...... 56 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....36 Engine Oil ...... 219 Gear Select Lever Override ...... 205 Introduction ...... 1 Flashers General Information...... 163 Inverter, Power...... 62 Hazard Warning ...... 180 Glass Cleaning ...... 249 iPod/USB/MP3 Control Turn Signal ...... 35, 74 Bluetooth Streaming Audio ...... 293 Turn Signals ...... 142 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) ...... 293 Fluid Capacities ...... 253 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 180 Jacking Instructions ...... 193 Fluid Leaks ...... 142 Headlights...... 33, 34 Jack Location ...... 192 Fluid Level Checks Automatic ...... 33, 34 Jack Operation ...... 192, 193, 227 Engine Oil ...... 218 Delay ...... 34 Jump Starting ...... 202 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 254 Time Delay ...... 34 Fog Lights ...... 33, 34, 35 Head Restraints ...... 29 Folding Rear Seat ...... 28 Head Rests...... 29 321 Key Fob Fog ...... 35 Child Protection ...... 23 Arm The Alarm ...... 18 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 180 Low Tire Pressure System ...... 96 Disarm The Alarm ...... 19 Headlights ...... 33 Lug Nuts ...... 251

INDEX Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 19 Hill Descent Control Indicator .....87 Key, Replacement...... 15 Low Fuel ...... 71 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 218 Keys ...... 13 Malfunction Indicator Maintenance Schedule...... 211 (Check Engine) ...... 71 Malfunction Indicator Light Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 35 Park ...... 74 (Check Engine) ...... 71, 77 Lane Change Assist...... 35 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 67 Manual, Service ...... 318 LaneSense ...... 168 Security Alarm ...... 70 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...... 23 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 103 Service ...... 184 Memory Feature (Memory Seats)...... 23 Latches ...... 142 Tire Pressure Monitoring Memory Seat...... 23 Hood ...... 52 (TPMS) ...... 72, 96 Memory Seats And Radio ...... 23 Leaks, Fluid ...... 142 Traction Control ...... 85 Mirrors ...... 33 Life Of Tires ...... 238 Turn Signal ...... 35, 74 Heated ...... 33 Liftgate ...... 53 Turn Signals ...... 142 Rearview ...... 180 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...... 37 Warning (Instrument Cluster Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...... 96 Light Bulbs...... 142 Description) ...... 69 Mopar ...... 256 Lights ...... 142 Loading Vehicle Mopar Accessories ...... 256 AirBag...... 67, 112, 140 Tires ...... 232 Mopar Parts ...... 317 Brake Assist Warning ...... 85 Load Shed Brake Warning ...... 67 Battery Saver Mode ...... 65 Navigation ...... 287, 289, 291 Bulb Replacement ...... 184 Battery Saver On ...... 65 New Vehicle Break-In Period ...... 143 Cruise ...... 74, 75, 76 Electrical Load Reduction ...... 65 Daytime Running ...... 33 Intelligent Battery Sensor ...... 65 Occupant Restraints ...... 101 Engine Temperature Warning ...... 69 Locks Oil Change Indicator ...... 64 Exterior ...... 142 Automatic Door ...... 22 Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...... 64 322 Oil, Engine Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . .59 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral Capacity ...... 253 Sunroof ...... 49 (N)...... 177 Checking ...... 218 Windows ...... 47 Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit Dipstick ...... 218 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .....109 Neutral (N) ...... 178 Filter ...... 219 Preparation For Jacking ...... 193 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Pressure Warning Light ...... 69 Pretensioners Neutral (N) ...... 178 Recommendation ...... 253 Seat Belts ...... 110 Refrigerant ...... 221 Viscosity ...... 253 Release, Hood ...... 52 Oil Filter, Change ...... 219 Radial Ply Tires ...... 237 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 102 Radio Oil Filter, Selection ...... 219 Remote Control Presets ...... 268, 272, 278 Oil Pressure Light ...... 69 Starting System ...... 17 Radio Frequency Onboard Diagnostic System ...... 76 Remote Keyless Entry General Information ...... 15, 17 Operating Precautions ...... 76 Arm The Alarm ...... 18 Radio Operation ...... 268 Overheating, Engine ...... 204 Radio Remote Controls ...... 258 Disarm The Alarm ...... 19 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .318 Radio Screens...... 269, 275 Remote Sound System (Radio) Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...... 36 Controls ...... 258 Parking Brake ...... 144 Rear Camera ...... 171 Remote Starting System ...... 17 ParkSense System, Front And Rear . . .166 Rear Cross Path ...... 92 Replacement Keys ...... 15 ParkSense System, Rear ...... 164, 166 Rear ParkSense System ...... 164, 166 Replacement Tires ...... 238 Pets ...... 139 Rear Seat, Folding ...... 28 Reporting Safety Defects...... 317 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) ...... 293 Rear Seats, Folding...... 23 Restraint, Head ...... 29 Phone (Pairing) ...... 296 Rear Wiper/Washer ...... 37 Restraints, Child...... 125 Phone (Uconnect) ...... 293 Recreational Towing...... 175 Roll Over Warning...... 2 Placard, Tire And Loading Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit Rotation, Tires ...... 244 Information ...... 232 Neutral (N) ...... 177 Power Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...... 140 Inverter ...... 62 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 142 323 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 317 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....106 Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Safety, Exhaust Gas...... 140 Operating Instructions ...... 105 Into Power Transfer Unit Safety Information, Tire ...... 227 Pregnant Women ...... 109 Neutral (N) ...... 177, 178

INDEX Safety Tips ...... 139 Pretensioners ...... 110 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Schedule, Maintenance ...... 211 Rear Seat ...... 103 Transfer Case Neutral (N) ...... 177 Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure ...... 106 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Seats ...... 23, 26 Transfer Case Neutral (N) ...... 178 Anchorage ...... 106 Adjustment ...... 23 Shift Lever Override...... 205 Automatic Locking Retractor Easy Entry ...... 23, 25 Shoulder Belts ...... 103 (ALR) ...... 110 Head Restraints ...... 29 Signals, Turn...... 35, 74, 142 Energy Management Feature .....110 Heated ...... 23, 26 Siri...... 311 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .....105 Memory ...... 23 Sirius Satellite Radio Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 103 Rear Folding ...... 23, 28 Traffic & Weather ...... 291 Pregnant Women ...... 109 Seatback Release ...... 23, 28 Sirius Travel Link ...... 291 Seat Belt Extender ...... 109 Tilting ...... 23 SiriusXM Guardian ...... 258 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 110 Vented ...... 23, 27 Account ...... 258 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 102 Ventilated ...... 23, 27 In Vehicle Features ...... 261 Seat Belt Maintenance ...... 248 Security Alarm ...... 18, 70 Maintaining Your Account ...... 261 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 67, 102 Arm The System ...... 18 Registration ...... 259 Seat Belts ...... 102, 140 Disarm The System ...... 19 Remote Features ...... 264 Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 106 Selec-Terrain ...... 154 Renewing Subscriptions ...... 260 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Sentry Key Replacement ...... 15 Send&Go...... 265 Anchorage ...... 106 Service Assistance ...... 315 Vehicle Finder ...... 265 Child Restraints ...... 125 Service Contract ...... 316 Vehicle Health Alert ...... 310 Extender ...... 109 Service Manuals ...... 318 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...... 242 Front Seat ...... 102, 103, 105 Shifting Snow Tires ...... 240 Inspection ...... 140 Automatic Transmission ...... 147 Spare Tires...... 240, 241 324 Speed Control Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .46 Snow Tires ...... 240 Accel/Decel ...... 158, 159 Text Messaging ...... 268, 301 Spare Tires ...... 240, 241 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...... 160 Tilt Steering Column ...... 31 Spinning ...... 237 Cancel ...... 159 Time Delay, Headlight ...... 34 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 237 Distance Setting (ACC Only) . .159, 162 Tire And Loading Information Placard . .232 Wheel Nut Torque ...... 251 Mode Setting (ACC Only) ...... 162 Tire Markings...... 227 Tire Safety Information ...... 227 Set...... 158 Tires...... 142, 235, 240, 245 Tire Service Speed Control (Cruise Control). . .157, 158 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 238 Kit . . . .196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 201 Starting ...... 17, 143 Air Pressure ...... 235 To Open Hood ...... 52 Remote ...... 17 Chains ...... 242 Towing ...... 174, 206 Starting Procedures ...... 143 Changing ...... 192, 227 Disabled Vehicle ...... 206 Steering...... 31 Compact Spare ...... 240 Recreational ...... 175 Tilt Column ...... 31 General Information ...... 235, 240 Towing Behind A Motorhome ...... 175 Wheel, Heated ...... 32 High Speed ...... 236 Traction Control ...... 82 Wheel, Tilt ...... 31 Inflation Pressure ...... 236 Trailer Sway Control (TSC)...... 86 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 258 Jacking ...... 192, 227 Trailer Towing ...... 174 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Life Of Tires ...... 238 Trailer And Tongue Weight ...... 174 Controls ...... 258 Load Capacity ...... 232 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 174 Storage, Vehicle ...... 47 Pressure Monitoring System Trailer Weight ...... 174 Stuck, Freeing ...... 205 (TPMS) ...... 72 Transaxle ...... 146 Sun Roof ...... 49 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .96 Automatic ...... 146 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Quality Grading ...... 245 Operation ...... 146 Bag...... 113 Radial ...... 237 Transmission ...... 147 Sway Control, Trailer ...... 86 Replacement ...... 238 Automatic ...... 147, 227 System, Remote Starting ...... 17 Rotation ...... 244 Maintenance ...... 227 Safety ...... 227, 235 Transporting Pets ...... 139 Telescoping Steering Column ...... 31 Sizes ...... 228 Tread Wear Indicators...... 237 325 Turn Signals ...... 35, 74 Vehicle Storage ...... 47 Windows Voice Command ...... 299 Close ...... 47 Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Voice Recognition System Down ...... 47

INDEX Display ...... 266, 268 (VR) ...... 299, 300, 303, 311 Open ...... 47 Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Power ...... 47 Display...... 275 Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 180 Up...... 47 Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display .....269 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Windshield Defroster ...... 141 Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) Descriptions) ...... 71 Windshield Washers ...... 36, 218 Making A Phone Call ...... 293, 300 Warning, Roll Over ...... 2 Fluid ...... 218 Receiving A Call ...... 293 Warranty Information ...... 317 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 223 Uconnect Phone . . . .293, 299, 300, 301 Washer Windshield Wipers ...... 36 Uconnect Voice Command .....299, 303 Rear ...... 37 Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 223 Uniform Tire Quality Grades...... 245 Washers, Windshield ...... 36, 218 Wiper, Rear...... 37 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....106 Washing Vehicle ...... 247 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 241 Vehicle Loading ...... 232 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 241 Vehicle Security Alarm Wind Buffeting ...... 50 (Security Alarm) ...... 18 Window Fogging...... 47

326 327 328 This guide has been prepared to help you get Driving and Alcohol quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of source for common questions. However, it is not a collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with substitute for your Owner’s Manual. blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking For complete operational instructions, maintenance driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect WARNING! manuals found on the website on the back cover The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your Important vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and Get warranty and other information online – you can recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any Not all features shown in this guide may apply your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, device or feature that may take their attention off the road. to your vehicle. For additional information on Never drink and then drive. Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious or your local Jeep® brand dealer. www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable done while the vehicle is moving. year, make and model of your vehicle. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. User Guide Second Edition Rev 1 CHEROKEE 19KL-926-AA Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next

appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). www.jeep.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often. Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. 2019 CHEROKEE USER GUIDE